Canon G7 X Mark II User Manual
Displayed below is the user manual for G7 X Mark II by Canon which is a product in the Digital Cameras category. This manual has pages.
Related Manuals
1
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
© CANON INC. 2016 CT0-D077-000-F101-B
●Make sure you read this guide, including the “Safety Precautions”
(=
14) section, before using the camera.
●Reading this guide will help you learn to use the camera properly.
●Store this guide safely so that you can use it in the future.
● Click the buttons in the lower right to access other pages.
: Next page
: Previous page
: Page before you clicked a link
●To jump to the beginning of a chapter, click the chapter title at right.
ENGLISH
Camera User Guide
2
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
Package Contents
Before use, make sure the following items are included in the package.
If anything is missing, contact your camera retailer.
Camera Battery Pack
NB-13L*
Battery Charger
CB-2LH/CB-2LHE Wrist Strap
* Do not peel off the adhesive covering from a battery pack.
●Printed matter is also included.
●A memory card is not included (=
2).
Compatible Memory Cards
The following memory cards (sold separately) can be used, regardless of
capacity.
●SD memory cards*1
●SDHC memory cards*1*2
●SDXC memory cards*1*2
*1 Cards conforming to SD standards. However, not all memory cards have been
veried to work with the camera.
*2 UHS-I memory cards are also supported.
Before Use
3
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
Conventions in This Guide
●In this guide, icons are used to represent the corresponding camera
buttons and dials on which they appear or which they resemble.
●The following camera buttons and controls are represented by icons.
Numbers in parentheses indicate the numbers of corresponding
controls in “Part Names” (=
4).
[ ] Control ring (11) on front
[ ] Up button (9) on back
[ ] Left button (14) on back
[ ] Right button (11) on back
[ ] Down button (12) on back
[ ] Control dial (6) on back
●Shooting modes and on-screen icons and text are indicated in
brackets.
●: Important information you should know
●: Notes and tips for expert camera use
●: Indicates touch-screen operations
●= xx: Pages with related information (in this example, “xx” represents
a page number)
●Instructions in this guide apply to the camera under default settings.
●For convenience, all supported memory cards are simply referred to as
the “memory card”.
●The symbols “ Still Images” and “ Movies” below titles indicate
how the function is used—whether for still images or movies.
Preliminary Notes and Legal Information
●Take and review some test shots initially to make sure the images
were recorded correctly. Please note that Canon Inc., its subsidiaries
and afliates, and its distributors are not liable for any consequential
damages arising from any malfunction of a camera or accessory,
including memory cards, that result in the failure of an image to be
recorded or to be recorded in a way that is machine readable.
●Images recorded by the camera shall be for personal use. Refrain
from unauthorized recording that infringes on copyright law, and note
that even for personal use, photography may contravene copyright
or other legal rights at some performances or exhibitions, or in some
commercial settings.
●The camera warranty is valid only in the area of purchase. In case of
camera problems while abroad, return to the area of purchase before
contacting a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
●Although the screen (monitor) is produced under extremely high-
precision manufacturing conditions and more than 99.99% of the
pixels meet design specications, in rare cases some pixels may be
defective or may appear as red or black dots. This is not a malfunction.
This does not affect recorded images either.
●When the camera is used over an extended period, it may become
warm. This does not indicate damage.
4
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
(8)
(10
)
(11)
(12
)
(7)
(
15
) (
16
)
(1) (3)(2) (4) (5) (6)
(13
)
(9)
(
14
)
(1) Screen (monitor)*2
(2) Microphone
(3) DIGITAL terminal
(4) HDMITM terminal
(5) [ (Wi-Fi)] button
(6) Control dial
(7) [ (Ring function selector)] /
[ (Single-image erase)] button
(8) Movie button
(9) [ (Drive mode)] / [ (Story
Highlights)] button / Up button
(10) [ (Quick Set menu/Set)] button
(11) [ (Flash)] / Right button
(12) [ (Information)] / Down
button
(13) Indicator
(14) [ (Macro)] / [ (Manual
focus)] / Left button
(15) [ (Playback)] button
(16) [ (Menu)] button
zTurning the control dial is one way to
choose setting items, switch images, and
perform other operations. Most of these
operations are also possible with the
[ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons.
Part Names
(
1)
(
3)
(
4)
(
2)
(8) (12) (13)(5) (11)(7)(6) (10)(9) (2)
(16)(15)(14)
(1) Zoom lever
Shooting: [ (telephoto)] /
[ (wide angle)]
Playback: [ (magnify)] /
[ (index)]
(2) Strap mount
(3) Lamp
(4) Lens
(5) Exposure compensation dial
(6) Mode dial
(7) Shutter button
(8) Power button
(9) Speaker
(10) Flash
(11) Control ring
(12) [ (Flash pop up)] switch
(13) Step/Continuous selection lever
(14) (N-Mark)*1
(15) Tripod socket
(16) Memory card/battery cover
*1 Used with NFC features (=
142).
*2 Gestures may not be detected as easily if you apply a screen protector. In this
case, increase the sensitivity of the touch-screen panel (=
174).
5
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
Table of Contents
Before Use
Package Contents .................................................................... 2
Compatible Memory Cards....................................................... 2
Preliminary Notes and Legal Information ................................. 3
Conventions in This Guide ....................................................... 3
Part Names .............................................................................. 4
Common Camera Operations ................................................ 12
Safety Precautions ................................................................. 14
Basic Guide
Basic Operations............................................................. 17
Touch-Screen Operations....................................................... 17
Touching ....................................................................................17
Dragging ....................................................................................17
Initial Preparations.................................................................. 18
Attaching the Strap .................................................................... 18
Holding the Camera ...................................................................18
Charging the Battery Pack .........................................................18
Inserting the Battery Pack and Your Memory Card ...................19
Removing the Battery Pack and Memory Card .....................20
Setting the Date and Time ......................................................... 20
Changing the Date and Time .................................................21
Display Language ...................................................................... 22
Trying the Camera Out ........................................................... 22
Shooting (Smart Auto) ...............................................................22
Viewing ......................................................................................24
Erasing Images .....................................................................25
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics ................................................................ 26
On/Off ..................................................................................... 26
Power-Saving Features (Auto Power Down) ............................. 27
Power Saving in Shooting Mode ...........................................27
Power Saving in Playback Mode ........................................... 27
Shutter Button ........................................................................ 27
Shooting Modes ..................................................................... 28
Adjusting the Screen (Monitor) Angle and Orientation ..............28
Tilting the Screen Downward ................................................. 28
Tilting the Screen Upward .....................................................28
Shooting Display Options ....................................................... 29
Using the Quick Set Menu...................................................... 29
Using Touch-Screen Operations to Congure Settings .............30
Using the Menu Screen .......................................................... 30
Touch-Screen Operations .......................................................... 31
On-Screen Keyboard.............................................................. 32
Indicator Display ..................................................................... 33
Clock ...................................................................................... 33
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ...................................... 34
Shooting with Camera-Determined Settings .......................... 34
Shooting (Smart Auto) ...............................................................34
Shooting in Hybrid Auto Mode ................................................... 36
Digest Movie Playback ..........................................................37
Still Images/Movies ...............................................................37
Still Images ............................................................................ 37
Movies ...................................................................................38
Scene Icons ............................................................................... 38
Continuous Shooting Scenes ................................................39
Image Stabilization Icons ...........................................................40
On-Screen Frames ....................................................................40
6
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
Preventing the AF-Assist Beam from Firing ...............................53
Preventing the Red-Eye Reduction Lamp from Lighting Up ......54
Changing the Image Display Style after Shots .......................... 54
Other Shooting Modes .................................................... 55
Specic Scenes ...................................................................... 55
Using Functions for Underwater Shots ...................................... 57
Shooting with an Underwater Focus Range .......................... 57
Correcting White Balance ......................................................57
Applying Special Effects ......................................................... 58
Shooting Yourself under Optimal Settings (Self Portrait) ...........58
Shooting Images with the Background Blurred to Convey a
Sense of Speed (Panning) ........................................................59
Shooting High-Contrast Scenes (High Dynamic Range) ...........60
Adding Artistic Effects ............................................................ 60
Shooting with a Fish-Eye Lens Effect (Fish-Eye Effect) ............ 60
Shots Resembling Oil Paintings (Art Bold Effect) ...................... 61
Shots Resembling Watercolors (Water Painting Effect) ............61
Shots Resembling Miniature Models (Miniature Effect) .............62
Playback Speed and Estimated Playback Time
(for One-Minute Clips) ...........................................................62
Shooting with a Toy Camera Effect (Toy Camera Effect) ...........63
Making Subjects Stand Out (Background Defocus) ..................63
Shooting with a Soft Focus Effect ..............................................64
Shooting in Monochrome (Grainy B/W) ..................................... 64
Special Modes for Other Purposes ........................................ 65
Shooting Starry Skies (Star) ...................................................... 65
Shooting People against Starry Skies (Star Portrait) ............65
Shooting Night Scenes under Starry Skies
(Star Nightscape) ..................................................................66
Shooting Star Trails (Star Trails) ...........................................67
Shooting Movies of Star Movement
(Star Time-Lapse Movie) .......................................................68
Common, Convenient Features ............................................. 41
Zooming In Closer on Subjects (Digital Zoom) .......................... 41
Shooting at Preset Focal Lengths (Step Zoom) ........................41
Changing the Way the Control of the Camera Feels with the
Step/Continuous Selection Lever ..........................................41
Resizing the Subject with the Control Ring ...............................42
Using the Self-Timer .................................................................. 42
Using the Self-Timer to Avoid Camera Shake .......................43
Customizing the Self-Timer ...................................................43
Shooting by Touching the Screen (Touch Shutter) ....................44
Continuous Shooting .................................................................44
Using Face ID......................................................................... 45
Personal Information .................................................................45
Registering Face ID Information ................................................ 45
Shooting ....................................................................................46
Checking and Editing Registered Information ...........................47
Overwriting and Adding Face Information .............................48
Erasing Registered Information ............................................. 49
Image Customization Features .............................................. 49
Changing the Aspect Ratio ........................................................ 49
Changing Image Quality ............................................................ 50
Changing Movie Image Quality .................................................50
For NTSC Video ....................................................................50
For PAL Video ........................................................................51
Helpful Shooting Features ...................................................... 51
Using the Dual Axis Electronic Level ......................................... 51
Deactivating Auto Level .............................................................52
Changing the IS Mode Settings ................................................. 52
Deactivating Image Stabilization ...........................................52
Recording Movies with Subjects at the Same Size Shown
before Shooting .........................................................................53
Customizing Camera Operation ............................................. 53
7
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
Custom White Balance .......................................................... 83
Manually Correcting White Balance ......................................83
Conguring White Balance Color Temperature .....................84
Customizing Colors (Picture Style) ............................................ 84
Customizing Picture Styles ....................................................85
Registering Customized Picture Styles .................................86
Shooting Range and Focusing ............................................... 87
Shooting Close-Ups (Macro) .....................................................87
Shooting in Manual Focus Mode ............................................... 87
Easily Identifying the Focus Area (MF Peaking) ....................88
Focus Bracketing (Focus-BKT Mode) ...................................88
Digital Tele-Converter ................................................................89
Choosing the AF Method ........................................................... 89
1-point AF ..............................................................................90
Moving and Resizing AF Frames (1-point AF) .......................90
+Tracking ............................................................................91
Shooting with Servo AF .............................................................91
Changing the Focus Setting ......................................................92
Fine-Tuning the Focus ...............................................................92
Choosing a Person to Focus On (Face Select) ......................... 93
Choosing Subjects to Focus On (Touch AF) ..............................93
Shooting with the AF Lock ......................................................... 94
Flash....................................................................................... 95
Changing the Flash Mode .........................................................95
Auto .......................................................................................95
On ..........................................................................................95
Slow Synchro ........................................................................95
Off .......................................................................................... 95
Adjusting the Flash Exposure Compensation ............................96
Shooting with the FE Lock ......................................................... 96
Changing the Flash Timing ........................................................97
Other Settings ........................................................................ 97
Adjusting Colors ....................................................................70
Adjusting the Focus ............................................................... 71
Recording Various Movies ...................................................... 72
Recording Movies in [ ] Mode .................................................72
Locking or Changing Image Brightness before recording .....72
Disabling Auto Slow Shutter ......................................................73
Correcting Severe Camera Shake .............................................73
Sound Settings ..........................................................................73
Deactivating the Wind Filter ..................................................73
Using the Attenuator .............................................................. 74
Recording Short Clips ................................................................74
Playback Effects ....................................................................74
Shooting Time-Lapse Movies (Time-Lapse Movie) ...................74
Recording iFrame Movies ..........................................................76
P Mode ............................................................................. 77
Shooting in Program AE ([P] Mode) ....................................... 77
Image Brightness (Exposure) ................................................. 78
Adjusting Image Brightness (Exposure Compensation) ............ 78
Deactivating Expo. Simulation ...............................................78
Locking Image Brightness / Exposure (AE Lock) ......................78
Changing the Metering Method .................................................79
Linking the Spot AE Point Frame to the AF Frame ................79
Changing the ISO Speed ...........................................................80
Adjusting ISO Auto Settings ..................................................80
Changing the Noise Reduction Level (High ISO Speed NR) .....80
Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB Shooting) ...............................81
Adjusting Auto ND Filter Settings ..............................................81
Auto Correction of Brightness and Contrast
(Auto Lighting Optimizer) ........................................................... 81
Shooting Bright Subjects (Highlight Tone Priority) ..................... 82
Image Colors .......................................................................... 82
Capturing Natural Colors (White Balance) ................................82
8
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
Overexposure Warning (for Image Highlights) .................... 112
Histogram ............................................................................ 113
RGB Histogram, GPS Information Display .......................... 113
Viewing Short Movies Created When Shooting Still Images
(Digest Movies) ........................................................................ 114
Viewing by Date ................................................................... 114
Checking People Detected in Face ID ..................................... 114
Browsing and Filtering Images ..............................................115
Navigating through Images in an Index ................................... 115
Touch-Screen Operations .................................................... 115
Finding Images Matching Specied Conditions ....................... 115
Using the Control Ring to Jump between Images ................... 117
Touch-Screen Operations .................................................... 117
Viewing Individual Images in a Group ..................................... 117
Editing Face ID Information ................................................... 118
Changing Names ..................................................................... 118
Erasing Names ........................................................................ 119
Image Viewing Options .........................................................119
Magnifying Images .................................................................. 119
Touch-Screen Operations ....................................................120
Viewing Slideshows ................................................................. 120
Protecting Images ................................................................ 121
Using the Menu .......................................................................121
Choosing Images Individually .................................................. 121
Selecting a Range ...................................................................122
Protecting All Images at Once .................................................122
Clearing All Protection at Once ...........................................123
Erasing Images .................................................................... 123
Erasing Multiple Images at Once .............................................124
Choosing a Selection Method .............................................124
Choosing Images Individually ..............................................124
Selecting a Range ...............................................................125
Changing Image Quality ............................................................ 97
Capturing in RAW Format .....................................................98
Using the Menu .....................................................................98
Changing the IS Mode Settings ................................................. 99
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode ................................................... 100
Specic Shutter Speeds ([Tv] Mode).................................... 100
Specic Aperture Values ([Av] Mode) ................................... 101
Specic Shutter Speeds and Aperture Values ([M] Mode) ... 101
Shooting Long Exposures (Bulb).......................................... 102
Adjusting the Flash Output ................................................... 103
Recording Movies at Specic Shutter Speeds and Aperture
Values ................................................................................... 103
Customization for Shooting Styles ....................................... 104
Changing Control Ring Settings ..............................................104
Functions Assignable to the Control Ring ...........................105
Assigning Functions to the Control Ring .............................105
Customizing Display Information ............................................. 106
Customizing the Information Displayed ............................... 106
Assigning Functions to Buttons ...............................................106
Customizing the Quick Set Menu ......................................... 107
Choosing Items to Include in the Menu ...................................107
Rearranging Menu Items ..................................................... 108
Saving Shooting Settings ..................................................... 108
Settings That Can Be Saved ...............................................108
Saving Commonly Used Shooting Menu Items (My Menu) .....109
Playback Mode .............................................................. 110
Viewing ..................................................................................110
Touch-Screen Operations .................................................... 111
Switching Display Modes ......................................................... 112
Customizing the Shooting Information Displayed ................ 112
9
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
Sending Images to a Smartphone ........................................ 142
Sending Images to an NFC-Compatible Smartphone .............142
Connecting via NFC When Camera Is Off or in Shooting
Mode ...................................................................................142
Connecting via NFC When Camera Is in Playback Mode ... 144
Adding a Smartphone .............................................................. 144
Using Another Access Point ....................................................146
Previous Access Points ...........................................................147
Saving Images to a Computer .............................................. 147
Preparing to Register a Computer ........................................... 147
Installing the Software .........................................................147
Congure the computer for a Wi-Fi connection
(Windows only) .................................................................... 148
Saving Images to a Connected Computer ...............................149
Conrming Access Point Compatibility ................................ 149
Using WPS-Compatible Access Points ...............................149
Connecting to Listed Access Points ....................................151
Previous Access Points .......................................................152
Sending Images to a Registered Web Service ..................... 153
Registering Web Services .......................................................153
Registering CANON iMAGE GATEWAY ..............................153
Registering Other Web Services .........................................155
Uploading Images to Web Services ........................................156
Printing Images Wirelessly from a Connected Printer .......... 157
Sending Images to Another Camera .................................... 158
Image Sending Options ........................................................ 159
Sending Multiple Images .........................................................159
Choosing Images Individually ..............................................159
Selecting a Range ...............................................................160
Sending Favorite Images ....................................................160
Notes on Sending Images .......................................................161
Choosing the Number of Recording Pixels (Image Size) ........161
Specifying All Images at Once .............................................125
Rotating Images ................................................................... 125
Using the Menu .......................................................................125
Deactivating Auto Rotation ......................................................126
Tagging Images as Favorites ............................................... 126
Using the Menu .......................................................................126
Convenient Control: Touch Actions ...................................... 127
Using Touch Actions Functions ................................................ 127
Changing Touch Actions Functions ......................................... 127
Assignable Functions ..........................................................128
Editing Still Images ............................................................... 128
Resizing Images ......................................................................128
Using the Menu .......................................................................129
Cropping ..................................................................................129
Applying Filter Effects .............................................................. 130
Correcting Red-Eye .................................................................131
Processing RAW Images on the Camera ............................. 132
Using the Menu .......................................................................133
Choosing Images Individually ..............................................133
Selecting a Range ...............................................................133
Editing Movies ...................................................................... 134
Reducing File Sizes ................................................................. 135
Image Quality of Compressed Movies ................................135
Editing Short Movies ................................................................135
Viewing Albums (Story Highlights) ....................................... 136
Choosing Themes for Albums ............................................. 136
Adding Background Music to Albums ...................................... 137
Creating Your Own Albums ......................................................138
Combining Short Clips.......................................................... 139
Wi-Fi Functions ............................................................. 141
Available Wi-Fi Features ...................................................... 141
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
World Clock .............................................................................172
Date and Time .........................................................................172
Lens Retraction Timing ............................................................ 173
Display Language .................................................................... 173
Silencing Camera Operations ..................................................173
Adjusting the Volume ...............................................................173
Customizing Sounds ................................................................174
Hiding Hints and Tips ...............................................................174
Listing Shooting Modes by Icon ...............................................174
Adjusting the Touch-Screen Panel ..........................................174
Metric / Non-Metric Display .....................................................175
Checking Certication Logos ................................................... 175
Setting Copyright Information to Record in Images .................175
Deleting All Copyright Information .......................................175
Adjusting Other Settings .......................................................... 176
Restoring Default Camera Settings ......................................... 176
Accessories ................................................................... 177
System Map ......................................................................... 177
Optional Accessories ............................................................ 178
Power Supplies ........................................................................178
Flash ........................................................................................ 178
Other Accessories ...................................................................178
Printers ....................................................................................179
Photo and Movie Storage ........................................................ 179
Using Optional Accessories.................................................. 179
Playback on a TV ....................................................................179
Inserting and Charging the Battery Pack.............................. 180
Using a Computer to Charge the Battery ............................181
Using the Software ............................................................... 182
Computer Connections via a Cable ......................................... 182
Checking Your Computer Environment ...............................182
Adding Comments ................................................................... 161
Sending Images Automatically (Image Sync) ....................... 162
Initial Preparations ................................................................... 162
Preparing the Camera .........................................................162
Preparing the Computer ......................................................162
Sending Images .......................................................................163
Viewing Images Sent via Image Sync on a
Smartphone ......................................................................... 163
Using a Smartphone to View Camera Images and Control
the Camera........................................................................... 164
Geotagging Images on the Camera ........................................164
Shooting Remotely ..................................................................164
Editing or Erasing Wi-Fi Settings.......................................... 165
Editing Connection Information ...............................................165
Changing a Device Nickname .............................................166
Erasing Connection Information ..........................................166
Changing the Camera Nickname ........................................166
Returning the Wi-Fi Settings to Default ...................................167
Setting Menu .................................................................. 168
Adjusting Basic Camera Functions ...................................... 168
Date-Based Image Storage ..................................................... 168
File Numbering ........................................................................168
Formatting Memory Cards ....................................................... 169
Low-Level Formatting .......................................................... 169
Changing the Video System ....................................................170
Electronic Level Calibration ..................................................... 170
Resetting the Electronic Level ............................................. 170
Start-Up Screen ....................................................................... 170
Using Eco Mode ......................................................................171
Power-Saving Adjustment .......................................................171
Screen Brightness ...................................................................171
Switching the Color of Screen Information ..............................172
11
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
Functions and Menu Tables ................................................. 200
Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode ...........................200
Quick Set Menu .......................................................................203
Shooting Tab ............................................................................206
Set Up Tab ............................................................................... 215
My Menu Tab ...........................................................................215
Playback Tab ...........................................................................216
Handling Precautions ........................................................... 217
Specications ....................................................................... 217
Camera .................................................................................... 217
Number of Shots/Recording Time, Playback Time .............. 219
Shooting Range ...................................................................219
Number of Shots per Memory Card ....................................220
Recording Time per Memory Card ......................................220
Battery Pack NB-13L ........................................................... 221
Battery Charger CB-2LH/CB-2LHE .....................................221
Compact Power Adapter CA-DC30/CA-DC30E ..................221
Index..................................................................................... 222
Wi-Fi (Wireless LAN) Precautions ........................................ 224
Radio Wave Interference Precautions ..................................... 224
Security Precautions ................................................................224
Trademarks and Licensing ..................................................225
Disclaimer ............................................................................225
Installing the Software .........................................................182
Saving Images to a Computer ................................................. 182
Printing Images .................................................................... 184
Easy Print ................................................................................184
Conguring Print Settings ........................................................ 185
Cropping Images before Printing .........................................185
Choosing Paper Size and Layout before Printing ...............186
Available Layout Options ..................................................... 186
Printing ID Photos ...............................................................186
Printing Movie Scenes ............................................................. 187
Movie Printing Options ........................................................187
Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF) ..................................187
Conguring Print Settings ....................................................188
Setting Up Printing for Individual Images ............................188
Setting Up Printing for a Range of Images .......................... 189
Setting Up Printing for All Images ........................................189
Clearing All Images from the Print List ................................189
Printing Images Added to the Print List (DPOF) .................. 189
Adding Images to a Photobook ...............................................190
Choosing a Selection Method .............................................190
Adding Images Individually ..................................................190
Adding All Images to a Photobook ......................................190
Removing All Images from a Photobook .............................190
Appendix ........................................................................ 191
Troubleshooting ................................................................... 191
On-Screen Messages........................................................... 195
On-Screen Information ......................................................... 197
Shooting (Information Display) ................................................197
Battery Level .......................................................................197
Playback (Detailed Information Display) ..................................198
Summary of Movie Control Panel ........................................199
12
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
Common Camera Operations
Shoot
●Use camera-determined settings (Auto Mode, Hybrid Auto Mode)
- =
34, =
36
●Shoot yourself under optimal settings (Self Portrait)
- =
58
Shooting people well
Portraits
(=
55)
Matching specic scenes
Night Scenes
(=
55)
Under Water
(=
57)
Fireworks
(=
56)
Starry Skies
(=
65)
Applying special effects
Fish-Eye Effect
(=
60)
Miniature Effect
(=
62)
Toy Camera Effect
(=
63)
Background
Defocus
(=
63)
Soft Focus
(=
64)
Monochrome
(=
64)
●Focus on faces
- =
34, =
55, =
91, =
93
●Without using the ash (Flash Off)
- =
34
●Include yourself in the shot (Self-Timer)
- =
42
●Movie clips and photos together (Movie Digest)
- =
36
●Shoot images with the background blurred to convey a sense of speed
- =
59
13
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
Save
●Save images to a computer
- =
182
Use Wi-Fi functions
●Send images to a smartphone
- =
142
●Share images online
- =
153
●Send images to a computer
- =
162
View
●View images (Playback Mode)
- =
110
●Automatic playback (Slideshow)
- =
120
●On a TV
- =
179
●On a computer
- =
182
●Browse through images quickly
- =
115
●Erase images
- =
123
●Create an album automatically
- =
136
Record/View Movies
●Record movies
- =
34, =
72, =
103
●View movies (Playback Mode)
- =
110
Print
●Print pictures
- =
184
14
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
●Avoid contact with liquid, and do not allow liquid or foreign objects
inside.
This could result in electrical shock or re.
If the product gets wet, or if liquid or foreign objects get inside, remove the
battery pack/batteries or unplug immediately.
●If your model has a viewnder or interchangeable lens, do not look
through the viewnder or lens at bright light sources (such as the sun
on a clear day, or a bright articial light source).
This may damage your eyesight.
●If your model has an interchangeable lens, do not leave the lens (or
the camera with the lens attached) in the sun without the lens cap on.
This could result in a re.
●Do not touch the product during thunderstorms if it is plugged in.
This could result in electrical shock or re. Immediately stop using the
product and distance yourself from it.
●Use only the recommended battery pack/batteries.
●Do not place the battery pack/batteries near or in direct ame.
This may cause the battery pack/batteries to explode or leak, resulting in
electrical shock, re, or injuries. If leaking battery electrolyte comes into
contact with eyes, mouth, skin, or clothing, immediately ush with water.
●If the product uses a battery charger, note the following precautions.
- Remove the plug periodically and, using a dry cloth, wipe away any
dust and dirt that has collected on the plug, the exterior of the power
outlet, and the surrounding area.
- Do not insert or remove the plug with wet hands.
- Do not use the equipment in a manner that exceeds the rated
capacity of the electrical outlet or wiring accessories. Do not use if
the plug is damaged or not fully inserted in the outlet.
- Do not allow dust or metal objects (such as pins or keys) to contact
the terminals or plug.
- Do not cut, damage, alter, or place heavy items on the power cord, if
your product uses one.
This could result in electrical shock or re.
Safety Precautions
●Before using the product, ensure that you read the safety precautions
described below. Always ensure that the product is used correctly.
●The safety precautions noted here are intended to prevent you and
other persons from being injured or incurring property damage.
●Be sure to also check the guides included with any separately sold
accessories you use.
Warning
Denotes the possibility of serious injury or death.
●Do not trigger the ash in close proximity to people’s eyes.
This could damage your eyesight. In particular, remain at least 1 meter
(3.3 feet) away from infants when using the ash.
●Store this equipment out of the reach of children and infants.
A strap wound around a child’s neck may result in asphyxiation.
If your product uses a power cord, mistakenly winding the cord around a
child’s neck may result in asphyxiation.
●Use only recommended power sources.
●Do not disassemble, alter, or apply heat to the product.
●Do not peel off the adhesive covering, if the battery pack has it.
●Avoid dropping or subjecting the product to severe impacts.
●Do not touch the interior of the product if it is broken, such as when
dropped.
●Stop using the product immediately if it emits smoke or a strange
smell, or otherwise behaves abnormally.
●Do not use organic solvents such as alcohol, benzine, or thinner to
clean the product.
15
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
●When using optional lenses, lens lters, or lter adapters (if
applicable), be sure to attach these accessories rmly.
If the lens accessory becomes loose and falls off, it may crack, and the
shards of glass may lead to cuts.
●On products that raise and lower the ash automatically, make sure to
avoid pinching your ngers with the lowering ash.
This could result in injury.
Caution
Denotes the possibility of property damage.
●Do not aim the camera at intense light sources, such as the sun on a
clear day or an intense articial light source.
Doing so may damage the image sensor or other internal components.
●When using the camera on a sandy beach or at a windy location, be
careful not to allow dust or sand to enter the camera.
●On products that raise and lower the ash automatically, do not push
the ash down or pry it open.
This may cause the product to malfunction.
●Wipe off any dust, grime, or other foreign matter on the ash with a
cotton swab or cloth.
The heat emitted from the ash may cause foreign matter to smoke or the
product to malfunction.
●Remove and store the battery pack/batteries when you are not using
the product.
Any battery leakage that occurs may cause product damage.
●Before you discard the battery pack/batteries, cover the terminals with
tape or other insulators.
Contacting other metal materials may lead to re or explosions.
●Unplug any battery charger used with the product when not in use. Do
not cover with a cloth or other objects when in use.
Leaving the unit plugged in for a long period of time may cause it to
overheat and distort, resulting in re.
●Turn the camera off in places where camera use is prohibited.
The electromagnetic waves emitted by the camera may interfere with the
operation of electronic instruments and other devices. Exercise adequate
caution when using the product in places where use of electronic devices
is restricted, such as inside airplanes and medical facilities.
●Do not allow the camera to maintain contact with skin for extended
periods.
Even if the camera does not feel hot, this may cause low-temperature
burns, manifested in redness of the skin or blistering. Use a tripod in hot
places, or if you have poor circulation or insensitive skin.
Caution
Denotes the possibility of injury.
●When carrying the product by the strap, be careful not to bang it,
subject it to strong impacts or shocks, or let it get caught on other
objects.
●Be careful not to bump or push strongly on the lens.
This could lead to injury or damage the camera.
●Be careful not to subject the screen to strong impacts.
If the screen cracks, injury may result from the broken fragments.
●When using the ash, be careful not to cover it with your ngers or
clothing.
This could result in burns or damage to the ash.
●Avoid using, placing, or storing the product in the following places:
- Places subject to direct sunlight
- Places subject to temperatures above 40 °C (104 °F)
- Humid or dusty places
These could cause leakage, overheating, or an explosion of the battery
pack/batteries, resulting in electrical shock, re, burns, or other injuries.
Overheating and damage may result in electrical shock, re, burns, or
other injuries.
●The slideshow transition effects may cause discomfort when viewed
for prolonged periods.
16
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
●Do not leave any dedicated battery packs near pets.
Pets biting the battery pack could cause leakage, overheating, or
explosion, resulting in product damage or re.
●If your product uses multiple batteries, do not use batteries that
have different levels of charge together, and do not use old and
new batteries together. Do not insert the batteries with the + and –
terminals reversed.
This may cause the product to malfunction.
●When putting the camera in your bag, ensure that hard objects do not
come into contact with the screen. Also close the screen (so that it
faces the body), if your product’s screen closes.
●Do not attach any hard objects to the product.
Doing so may cause malfunctions or damage the screen.
17
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Touch-Screen Operations
The camera’s touch-screen panel enables intuitive operation simply by
touching or tapping the screen.
Touching
Touch the screen briey with your
nger.
zThis gesture is used to shoot, congure
camera functions, and so on.
Dragging
Touch the screen and move your nger
across it.
zThis gesture is used in Playback mode
to switch to the next image, or to change
the magnied image area, among other
operations.
Basic information and instructions, from initial
preparations to shooting and playback
Basic Guide
Basic Operations
18
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Charging the Battery Pack
Before use, charge the battery pack with the included charger. Be sure to
charge the battery pack initially, because the camera is not sold with the
battery pack charged.
1 Insert the battery pack.
zAfter aligning the marks on the battery
pack and charger, insert the battery pack
by pushing it in (1) and down (2).
2 Charge the battery pack.
zCB-2LH: Flip out the plug (1) and plug
the charger into a power outlet (2).
zCB-2LHE: Plug the power cord into the
charger, then plug the other end into a
power outlet.
zThe charging lamp turns orange, and
charging begins.
zWhen charging is nished, the lamp turns
green.
3 Remove the battery pack.
zAfter unplugging the battery charger,
remove the battery pack by pushing it in
(1) and up (2).
●To protect the battery pack and keep it in optimal condition, do not
charge it continuously for more than 24 hours.
●For battery chargers that use a power cord, do not attach the
charger or cord to other objects. Doing so could result in
malfunction or damage to the product.
(1)
(2)
(1)
(2)
CB-2LH
CB-2LHE
(2)
(1)
Initial Preparations
Prepare for shooting as follows.
Attaching the Strap
Attach the strap.
zThread the end of the strap through the
strap mount (1), and then pull the other
end of the strap through the loop on the
threaded end (2).
zThe strap can also be attached to the left
side of the camera.
Holding the Camera
zPlace the strap around your wrist.
zWhen shooting, keep your arms close to
your body and hold the camera securely
to prevent it from moving. If you have
raised the ash, do not rest your ngers
on it.
(2)
(1)
19
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
2 Insert the battery pack.
z
Holding the battery pack with the
terminals in the position shown (1), hold
the battery lock toward (2) and insert
the battery pack toward (3) until the lock
clicks shut.
zIf you insert the battery pack facing the
wrong way, it cannot be locked into the
correct position. Always conrm that the
battery pack is facing the right way and
locks when inserted.
3 Check your card’s write-protect
switch and insert the memory card.
zRecording is not possible on memory
cards with a write-protect switch when the
switch is in the locked position. Move the
switch toward (1).
zInsert the memory card with the label (2)
facing as shown until it clicks into place.
zMake sure the memory card is facing the
right way when you insert it. Inserting
memory cards facing the wrong way may
damage the camera.
4 Close the cover.
zLower the cover (1) and hold it down as
you slide the switch, until it clicks into the
closed position (2).
(3)
(1)
(2)
(2)
(1)
(1)
(2)
●For details on charging time and the number of shots and
recording time possible with a fully charged battery pack, see
“Number of Shots/Recording Time, Playback Time” (=
219).
●Charged battery packs gradually lose their charge, even when
they are not used. Charge the battery pack on (or immediately
before) the day of use.
●As a visual reminder of the charge status, attach the battery cover
with visible on a charged battery pack and concealed on an
uncharged one.
●The charger can be used in areas with 100 – 240 V AC power
(50/60 Hz). For power outlets in a different format, use a
commercially available adapter for the plug. Never use an
electrical transformer designed for traveling, which may damage
the battery pack.
Inserting the Battery Pack and Your Memory
Card
Insert the included battery pack and a memory card (sold separately).
Note that before using a memory card that is new or has been formatted
in another device, you should format the memory card with this camera
(=
169).
1 Open the cover.
zSlide the switch (1) and open the cover
(2).
(2)
(1)
20
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Setting the Date and Time
Set the current date and time correctly as follows if the [Date/Time] screen
is displayed when you turn the camera on. Information you specify this
way is recorded in image properties when you shoot, and it is used when
you manage images by shooting date or print images showing the date.
1 Turn the camera on.
zPress the power button.
zThe [Date/Time] screen is displayed.
2 Set the date and time.
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
item.
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to specify the date and time.
zWhen nished, press the [ ] button.
3 Specify your home time zone.
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons to choose your
home time zone.
4 Finish the setup process.
zPress the [ ] button when nished.
After a conrmation message, the setting
screen is no longer displayed.
zTo turn off the camera, press the power
button.
●For guidelines on how many shots or hours of recording can be
saved on one memory card, see “Number of Shots per Memory
Card” (=
220).
Removing the Battery Pack and Memory Card
Remove the battery pack.
zOpen the cover and press the battery
lock in the direction of the arrow.
zThe battery pack will pop up.
Remove the memory card.
zPush the memory card in until it clicks,
and then slowly release it.
zThe memory card will pop up.
21
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Changing the Date and Time
Adjust the date and time as follows.
1 Access the menu screen.
zPress the [ ] button.
2 Choose [Date/Time].
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the
[ 2] tab.
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[ ] dial to choose [Date/Time], and then
press the [ ] button.
3 Change the date and time.
zFollow step 2 in “Setting the Date and
Time” (=
20) to adjust the settings.
zPress the [ ] button to close the
menu screen.
●The camera has a built-in date/time battery (backup battery).
Date/time settings can be retained for about 3 weeks after the
battery pack is removed.
●The date/time battery will be charged in about 4 hours once you
insert a charged battery pack, even if power to the camera is
turned off.
●Once the date/time battery is depleted, the [Date/Time] screen will
be displayed when you turn the camera on. Set the correct date
and time as described in “Setting the Date and Time” (=
20).
●Unless you set the date, time, and home time zone, the [Date/
Time] screen will be displayed each time you turn the camera on.
Specify the correct information.
●To set daylight saving time (1 hour ahead), choose [ ] in step 2
and then choose [ ] by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or turning
the [ ] dial.
●You can also set the date and time by touching the desired item
on the screen in step 2 and then touching [ ][ ], followed
by [ ]. Similarly, you can also set your home time zone by
touching [ ][ ] on the screen in step 3, followed by [ ].
22
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Trying the Camera Out
Still Images Movies
Follow these instructions to turn the camera on, shoot still images or
movies, and then view them.
Shooting (Smart Auto)
For fully automatic selection of the optimal settings for specic scenes,
simply let the camera determine the subject and shooting conditions.
1 Turn the camera on.
zPress the power button.
zThe startup screen is displayed.
2 Enter [ ] mode.
zSet the mode dial to [ ].
zAim the camera at the subject. The
camera will make a slight clicking noise
as it determines the scene.
zIcons representing the scene and image
stabilization mode are displayed in the
upper left of the screen.
zFrames displayed around any detected
subjects indicate that they are in focus.
3 Compose the shot.
zTo zoom in and enlarge the subject, move
the zoom lever toward [ ] (telephoto),
and to zoom away from the subject, move
it toward [ ] (wide angle).
Display Language
Change the display language as needed.
1 Enter Playback mode.
zPress the [ ] button.
2 Access the setting screen.
zPress and hold the [ ] button, and then
immediately press the [ ] button.
3 Set the display language.
zPress the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose a language, and
then press the [ ] button.
zOnce the display language has been set,
the setting screen is no longer displayed.
●The current time is displayed if you wait too long in step 2 after
pressing the [ ] button before you press the [ ] button.
In this case, press the [ ] button to dismiss the time display and
repeat step 2.
●You can also change the display language by pressing the
[] button and choosing [Language ] on the [ 3] tab.
●You can also set the display language by touching a language on
the screen in step 3 and then touching it again.
23
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Recording Movies
1) Start recording.
zPress the movie button. The camera
beeps once as recording begins, and
[ Rec] is displayed with the elapsed
time (1).
zBlack bars are displayed on the top and
bottom edges of the screen, and the
subject is slightly enlarged. The black
bars indicate image areas not recorded.
zFrames displayed around any detected
faces indicate that they are in focus.
zOnce recording begins, take your nger
off the movie button.
2) Finish recording.
zPress the movie button again to stop
recording. The camera beeps twice as
recording stops.
(1)
4 Shoot.
Shooting Still Images
1) Focus.
zPress the shutter button lightly, halfway
down. The camera beeps twice after
focusing, and frames are displayed to
indicate image areas in focus.
zIf [Raise the ash] is displayed, move
the [ ] switch to raise the ash. It will re
when shooting. If you prefer not to use
the ash, push it down with your nger,
into the camera.
2) Shoot.
zPress the shutter button all the way
down.
zAs the camera shoots, a shutter sound
is played, and in low-light conditions
when you have raised the ash, it res
automatically.
zKeep the camera still until the shutter
sound ends.
zAfter displaying your shot, the camera will
revert to the shooting screen.
24
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
3 Play movies.
zPress the [ ] button, press the [ ][ ]
buttons to choose [ ], and then press the
[ ] button again.
zPlayback now begins, and after the movie
is nished, [ ] is displayed.
zTo adjust the volume, press the [ ][ ]
buttons during playback.
●To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mode, press the
shutter button halfway.
●You can also start movie playback by touching [ ]. To adjust
the volume, quickly drag up or down across the screen during
playback.
Viewing
After shooting images or movies, you can view them on the screen as
follows.
1 Enter Playback mode.
zPress the [ ] button.
zYour last shot is displayed.
2 Choose images.
zTo view the previous image, press
the [ ] button or turn the [ ] dial
counterclockwise. To view the next
image, press the [ ] button or turn the
[ ] dial clockwise.
zPress and hold the [ ][ ] buttons to
browse through images quickly.
zTo access this screen (Scroll Display
mode), turn the [ ] dial rapidly. In this
mode, turn the [ ] dial to browse through
images.
zTo return to single-image display, press
the [ ] button.
zMovies are identied by a [ ] icon.
To play movies, go to step 3.
25
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Erasing Images
You can choose and erase unneeded images one by one. Erased images
cannot be recovered. Be sure that you want to erase the image before
using this option.
1 Choose an image to erase.
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image.
2 Erase the image.
zPress the [ ] button.
zAfter [Erase?] is displayed, press the
[][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [Erase], and then press the [ ]
button.
zThe current image is now erased.
zTo cancel erasure, press the [ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose
[Cancel], and then press the [ ] button.
●You can choose multiple images to erase at once (=
124).
●You can also erase the current image by touching [Erase] on the
screen in step 2.
●Images can also be erased by using Touch Actions (=
127).
26
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
On/Off
Shooting Mode
zPress the power button to turn the
camera on and prepare for shooting.
zTo turn the camera off, press the power
button again.
Playback Mode
zPress the [ ] button to turn the camera
on and view your shots.
zTo turn the camera off, press the [ ]
button again.
●To switch to Playback mode from Shooting mode, press the [ ]
button.
●The lens will be retracted after about one minute once the camera
is in Playback mode. You can turn the camera off when the lens is
retracted by pressing the [ ] button.
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Other basic operations and more ways to enjoy your
camera, including shooting and playback options
27
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Shutter Button
To ensure your shots are in focus, always begin by holding the shutter
button halfway down, and once the subject is in focus, press the button all
the way down to shoot.
In this manual, shutter button operations are described as pressing the
button halfway or all the way down.
1 Press halfway. (Press lightly to
focus.)
zPress the shutter button halfway. The
camera beeps twice, and frames are
displayed around image areas in focus.
2 Press all the way down. (From the
halfway position, press fully to
shoot.)
zThe camera shoots, as a shutter sound
is played.
zKeep the camera still until the shutter
sound ends.
●Images may be out of focus if you shoot without initially pressing
the shutter button halfway.
●Length of shutter sound playback varies depending on the time
required for the shot. It may take longer in some shooting scenes,
and images will be blurry if you move the camera (or the subject
moves) before the shutter sound ends.
Power-Saving Features (Auto Power Down)
As a way to conserve battery power, the camera automatically deactivates
the screen (Display Off) and then turns itself off after a specic period of
inactivity.
Power Saving in Shooting Mode
The screen is automatically deactivated after about one minute of
inactivity. In about two more minutes, the lens is retracted and the camera
turns itself off. To activate the screen and prepare for shooting when
the screen is off but the lens is still out, press the shutter button halfway
(=
27).
Power Saving in Playback Mode
The camera turns itself off automatically after about ve minutes of
inactivity.
●You can deactivate Auto Power Down and adjust the timing of
Display Off, if you prefer (=
171).
●Power saving is not active while the camera is connected to other
devices via Wi-Fi (=
141), or when connected to a computer
(=
182).
28
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Adjusting the Screen (Monitor) Angle and
Orientation
You can adjust the screen angle and orientation to suit the scene or how
you are shooting.
Tilting the Screen Downward
zPull the top of the screen down toward
you.
zThe screen can be tilted downward
approximately 45 °.
Tilting the Screen Upward
zThe screen can be tilted upward
approximately 180 °.
zWhen including yourself in shots, you
can view a mirror image of yourself by
rotating the screen around toward the
front of the camera.
zWhen nished, rotate the screen until it
clicks into place to close it.
●When the camera is not in use, keep the screen closed.
●Do not force the screen open too far, which may damage the
camera.
●To cancel reverse display, press the [ ] button, choose
[Reverse Display] on the [ 1] tab, and then choose [Off].
Shooting Modes
Use the mode dial to access each shooting mode.
(
1)
(
2)
(
3
)
(4)
(1) Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode
Fully automatic shooting, with
camera-determined settings
(=
22, =
34, =
36).
(2) Special Scene Mode
Shoot with settings designed for
specic scenes, or add a variety of
effects (=
55).
(3) Movie Mode
For shooting movies (=
72,
=
103).
You can also shoot movies when
the mode dial is not set to Movie
mode, simply by pressing the
movie button.
(4) P, Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Take a variety of shots using
your preferred settings (=
77,
=
100).
29
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Using the Quick Set Menu
Congure commonly used functions in the (Quick Set) menu.
Note that menu items and options vary depending on the shooting mode
(=
203).
1 Access the menu.
zPress the [ ] button.
2 Choose a menu item.
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons to choose a
menu item (1).
zAvailable options (2) are shown at the
bottom of the screen.
3 Choose an option.
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an option.
zItems labeled with a [ ] icon can
be congured by pressing the [ ]
button.
zItems labeled with a [ ] icon can be
congured by pressing the [ ] button.
zItems labeled with a [ ] icon can be
congured by pressing the [ ] button.
(
1
) (
2
)
Shooting Display Options
Press the [ ] button to show or hide the grid lines and electronic level.
To congure the on-screen display in greater detail, access [ 1] tab ►
[Shooting information display] (=
106).
●Screen brightness is automatically increased by the night view
function when you are shooting under low light, making it easier
to check how shots are composed. However, on-screen image
brightness may not match the brightness of your shots. Note that
any on-screen image distortion or jerky subject motion will not
affect recorded images.
●For playback display options, see “Switching Display Modes”
(=
112).
30
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Using the Menu Screen
Congure a variety of camera functions through the menu screen as
follows.
1 Access the menu screen.
zPress the [ ] button.
2 Choose a tab.
zTabs represent functions (1), such as
shooting ([ ]), playback ([ ]), or
settings ([ ]), or pages within each
function (2). Tabs are identied in this
manual by combining the function and
page, as in [ 1].
zMove the zoom lever to choose the
function tab, and then press the [ ][ ]
buttons to choose the page tab.
zYou can also drag left or right across the
screen to choose the page tab.
3 Choose a menu item.
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an item, and then press
the [ ] button.
zFor menu items with options not shown,
rst press the [ ] button to switch
screens, and then either press the [ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to select the
menu item.
zTo return to the previous screen, press
the [ ] button.
4 Conrm your choice and exit.
zPress the [ ] button.
zThe screen before you pressed the
[] button in step 1 is displayed again,
showing the option you congured.
●To undo any accidental setting changes, you can restore the
camera’s default settings (=
176).
●You can also exit by choosing [ ] in the menu items and
pressing the [ ] button.
Using Touch-Screen Operations to Congure
Settings
zTouch [ ] in the upper right of the screen
to access the Quick Set menu.
zTouch a menu item and then an option to
complete the setting.
zTo return to the previous screen, touch
the [ ] menu item, or touch the selected
option again.
zYou can access the screen for items
labeled with a [ ] icon by touching
[ ].
zYou can access the screen for items
labeled with a [ ] icon by touching
[ ].
zYou can access the screen for items
labeled with a [ ] icon by touching
[ ].
31
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Touch-Screen Operations
●To choose tabs, press the [ ] button to access the menu screen,
and then touch the desired function tab and page tab.
●Drag the menu items up or down to scroll them, or touch a menu item
to choose it.
●Touch an option to complete the setting and return to the menu item
selection screen.
●For menu items displayed with a bar to indicate the level, touch the
desired position on the bar.
●To congure menu items for which options are not shown, rst touch
the menu item to access the setting screen. On the setting screen,
either drag or touch to choose the item, and then touch to choose the
option. To return to the previous screen, touch [ ].
●You can also touch input elements (such as check boxes or text elds)
to select them, and you can enter text by touching the on-screen
keyboard.
●When [ ] is shown, you can touch [ ] instead of pressing the
[ ] button, if you prefer.
●When [ ] is shown, you can touch [ ] instead of pressing the
[ ] button, if you prefer.
●When [ ] is shown, the same operation is possible by touching
[ ] instead of pressing [ ].
●When [ ] is shown, you can touch [ ] instead of pressing the
[ ] button, if you prefer.
●To dismiss the menu, press the [ ] button again.
4 Choose an option.
zWhen options are listed vertically, press
the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose an option.
zWhen options are listed horizontally,
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an option.
5 Conrm your choice and exit.
zPress the [ ] button to conrm your
choice and return to the menu item
selection screen.
zPress the [ ] button to return to the
screen displayed before you pressed the
[ ] button in step 1.
●To undo any accidental setting changes, you can restore the
camera’s default settings (=
176).
●Available menu items vary depending on the selected shooting or
playback mode (=
206 – =
216).
32
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Deleting Characters
zTo delete the previous character, either
touch [ ] or press the [ ] button.
zTouching and holding [ ] will delete ve
characters at a time.
Conrming Input and Returning to the
Previous Screen
zPress the [ ] button.
●For some functions, [ ] is not displayed and cannot be used.
●Another way to use the keyboard is by pressing the [ ][ ][ ][ ]
buttons or turning the [ ] dial to select characters or icons, and
then pressing the [ ] button. You can also move the cursor by
turning the [ ] ring. To return to the previous screen, press the
[] button.
On-Screen Keyboard
Use the on-screen keyboard to enter information for Face ID (=
45),
Wi-Fi connections (=
141), and so on. Note that the length and type of
information you can enter varies depending on the function you are using.
Entering Characters
zTouch the characters to enter them.
zThe amount of information you can enter
(1) varies depending on the function you
are using.
Moving the Cursor
zTouch [ ] or [ ], or turn the [ ] ring.
Entering Line Breaks
zTouch [ ].
Switching Input Modes
zTo switch to numbers or symbols, touch
[ ].
zTouch [ ] to enter capital letters.
zAvailable input modes vary depending on
the function you are using.
(1)
33
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Clock
You can check the current time.
zPress and hold the [ ] button.
zThe current time appears.
zIf you hold the camera vertically while
using the clock function, it will switch to
vertical display.
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial or turn the [ ] ring to change the
display color.
zPress the [ ] button again to cancel the
clock display.
●When the camera is off, press and hold the [ ] button, then
press the power button to display the clock.
Indicator Display
The indicator on the back of the camera (=
4) lights up or blinks
depending on the camera status.
Color Indicator
Status Camera Status
Green Blinking
Starting up, recording/reading/transmitting
images, shooting long exposures (=
100,
=
101), connected to a computer (=
182),
connecting/transmitting via Wi-Fi, or display
off (=
27, =
171, =
171)
Orange On Charging via USB
●When the indicator blinks green, never turn the camera off, open
the memory card/battery cover, or shake or jolt the camera. This
may corrupt images or damage the camera or memory card.
34
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Shooting with Camera-Determined
Settings
For fully automatic selection of the optimal settings for specic scenes,
simply let the camera determine the subject and shooting conditions.
Shooting (Smart Auto)
Still Images Movies
1 Turn the camera on.
zPress the power button.
zThe startup screen is displayed.
2 Enter [ ] mode.
zSet the mode dial to [ ].
zAim the camera at the subject. The
camera will make a slight clicking noise
as it determines the scene.
zIcons representing the scene and image
stabilization mode are displayed in
the upper left of the screen (=
38,
=
40).
zFrames displayed around any detected
subjects indicate that they are in focus.
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Convenient mode for easy shots with greater control
over shooting
35
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
2) Shoot.
zPress the shutter button all the way
down.
zAs the camera shoots, a shutter sound
is played, and in low-light conditions
when you have raised the ash, it res
automatically.
zKeep the camera still until the shutter
sound ends.
zAfter displaying your shot, the camera will
revert to the shooting screen.
Recording Movies
1) Start recording.
zPress the movie button. The camera
beeps once as recording begins, and
[ Rec] is displayed with the elapsed
time (1).
zBlack bars are displayed on the top and
bottom edges of the screen, and the
subject is slightly enlarged. The black
bars indicate image areas not recorded.
zFrames displayed around any detected
faces indicate that they are in focus.
zOnce recording begins, take your nger
off the movie button.
(1)
3 Compose the shot.
zTo zoom in and enlarge the subject, move
the zoom lever toward [ ] (telephoto),
and to zoom away from the subject, move
it toward [ ] (wide angle). (A zoom
bar (1) showing the zoom position is
displayed, along with the range of focus
(2).)
4 Shoot.
Shooting Still Images
1) Focus.
zPress the shutter button halfway. The
camera beeps twice after focusing, and
frames are displayed to indicate image
areas in focus.
zSeveral frames are displayed when
multiple areas are in focus.
zIf [Raise the ash] is displayed, move
the [ ] switch to raise the ash. It will re
when shooting. If you prefer not to use
the ash, push it down with your nger,
into the camera.
(1)
(
2
)
36
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Shooting in Hybrid Auto Mode
Still Images Movies
You can make a short movie of the day just by shooting still images. The
camera records 2 – 4-second clips of scenes before each shot, which are
later combined in a digest movie.
Clips recorded in this mode may be included in Story Highlights albums
(=
136).
1 Enter [ ] mode.
zFollow step 2 in “Shooting (Smart Auto)”
(=
34) and choose [ ].
2 Compose the shot.
zFollow steps 3 – 4 in “Shooting (Smart
Auto)” (=
34) to compose the shot and
focus.
zFor more impressive digest movies,
aim the camera at subjects about four
seconds before shooting still images.
3 Shoot.
zFollow step 4 in “Shooting (Smart Auto)”
(=
34) to shoot a still image.
zThe camera records both a still image
and movie clip. The clip, which ends with
the still image and a shutter sound, forms
a single chapter in the digest movie.
2) Resize the subject and recompose
the shot as needed.
zTo resize the subject, repeat the
operations in step 3.
However, note that the sound of camera
operations will be recorded. Note that
movies shot at zoom factors shown in
blue will look grainy.
zWhen you recompose shots, the
focus, brightness, and colors will be
automatically adjusted.
3) Finish recording.
zPress the movie button again to stop
recording. The camera beeps twice as
recording stops.
zRecording will stop automatically when
the memory card becomes full.
37
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Still Images/Movies
●If the camera makes no operating sounds, it may have been
turned on while holding down [ ]. To activate sounds, press
the [ ] button, choose [Mute] on the [ 3] tab, and then
choose [Off].
Still Images
●A blinking [ ] icon warns that images are more likely to be
blurred by camera shake. In this case, mount the camera on a
tripod or take other measures to keep it still.
●If your shots are dark despite the ash ring, move closer to the
subject. For details on the ash range, see “Camera” (=
217).
●The subject may be too close if the camera only beeps once
when you press the shutter button halfway. For details on the
range of focus (shooting range), see “Shooting Range” (=
219).
●To reduce red-eye and to assist in focusing, the lamp may be lit
when shooting in low-light conditions.
●A blinking [ ] icon displayed when you attempt to shoot
indicates that shooting is not possible until the ash has nished
recharging. Shooting can resume as soon as the ash is ready,
so either press the shutter button all the way down and wait, or
release it and press it again.
●No shutter sound is played when “Sleeping” and “Sleeping
Babies” icons (=
38) are displayed.
●Although you can shoot again before the shooting screen
is displayed, your previous shot may determine the focus,
brightness, and colors used.
●You can change how long images are displayed after shots
(=
54).
●Battery life is shorter in this mode than in [ ] mode, because
digest movies are recorded for each shot.
●A digest movie may not be recorded if you shoot a still image
immediately after turning the camera on, choosing [ ] mode, or
operating the camera in other ways.
●Sounds and vibrations from operating the camera will be recorded
in digest movies.
●Digest movie image quality is automatically set to [ ] for
NTSC or [ ] for PAL and cannot be changed (=
170).
●Sounds are not played when you press the shutter button halfway
or trigger the self-timer (=
174).
●Digest movies are saved as separate movie les in the following
cases even if they were recorded on the same day in [ ] mode.
- The digest movie le size reaches approximately 4 GB, or the
total recording time reaches approximately 16 minutes and 40
seconds.
- The digest movie is protected (=
121).
- Daylight saving time (=
20) or time zone (=
172) settings
are changed.
- A new folder is created (=
168).
●Recorded shutter sounds cannot be modied or erased.
●If you prefer to record digest movies without still images, adjust
the setting in advance. Choose MENU (=
30) ► [ 7] tab ►
[Digest Type] ► [No Stills].
●Individual chapters can be edited (=
135).
Digest Movie Playback
Display a still image shot in [ ] mode to play the digest movie created
on the same day, or specify the date of the digest movie to play (=
114).
38
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Scene Icons
Still Images Movies
In [ ] and [ ] modes, shooting scenes determined by the camera
are indicated by the icon displayed, and corresponding settings are
automatically selected for optimal focusing, subject brightness, and color.
Depending on the scene, continuous images may be shot (=
39).
Subject Background
Normal Backlit Dark*1Sunsets Spotlights
People *2*3–
Moving People *3*3– – –
Shadows on Face *2– – – –
Smiling *3*3– – –
Sleeping *2*3– – –
Babies *3*3– – –
Smiling Babies *3*3– – –
Sleeping Babies *2*3– – –
Moving Children *3*3– – –
Other Subjects *2*3
Other Moving Subjects *3*3– – –
Other Close-Range
Subjects *2*3– –
*1 Tripod used.
*2 The background color of icons is light blue when the background is a blue sky,
dark blue when the background is dark, and gray for all other backgrounds.
*3 The background color of icons is light blue when the background is a blue sky,
and gray for all other backgrounds.
●The background color of [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], and [ ] is dark blue,
and the background color of [ ] is orange.
●For movies, only People, Other Subjects, and Other Close-Range
Subjects icons are displayed.
●In [ ] mode, icons are only displayed for People, Shadows on Face,
Other Subjects, and Other Close-Range Subjects.
Movies
●Before movie recording, lower the ash with your nger. During
recording, keep your ngers away from the microphone (1).
Leaving the ash raised, or blocking the microphone may prevent
audio from being recorded or may cause the recording to sound
mufed.
●Avoid touching camera controls other than the movie button when
recording movies, because sounds made by the camera will be
recorded.
●Once movie recording begins, the image display area changes
and subjects are enlarged to allow for correction of signicant
camera shake. To record subjects at the same size shown before
recording, follow the steps in “Recording Movies with Subjects at
the Same Size Shown before Shooting” (=
53).
(1)
●Audio is recorded in stereo.
39
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Continuous Shooting Scenes
If the icon for one of the following scenes (in table’s left column) is
displayed when you shoot a still image, the camera shoots continuously. If
the icon for one of the following scenes (in table’s left column) is displayed
when you press the shutter button halfway, one of the icons [ ], [ ], or
[ ] is displayed to inform you that the camera shoots continuously.
Smiling
(including Babies)
Consecutive images are captured, and the camera
analyzes details such as facial expressions to save
the image determined to be the best.
Sleeping
(including Babies)
Beautiful shots of sleeping faces, created by
combining consecutive shots to reduce camera
shake and image noise.
The AF-assist beam and the ash will not re. Also,
the shutter sound will not be played.
Children So you don’t miss a photo opportunity of children
who move around, the camera will capture three
consecutive images for each shot.
●In some scenes, expected images may not be saved, and images
may not look as expected.
●Focus, image brightness, and color are determined by the rst
shot.
●When you want to shoot single images only, press the [ ] button,
and then select [ ] (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[] dial).
●For self-timer shots, icons are not displayed for the following subjects:
moving, smiling, or sleeping people; smiling or sleeping babies;
moving children; and other moving subjects.
●Icons are not displayed for smiling or sleeping subjects and moving
children in drive modes other than [ ] (=
39, =
44).
●Backlit icons are not displayed for moving children and smiling people
when the ash is set to [ ].
●Icons for babies (including smiling and sleeping babies) and moving
children are displayed when [Face ID] is set to [On] and faces of
registered babies (less than two years old) or children (2 – 12 years
old) are detected (=
45). Conrm beforehand that the date and time
are correct (=
20).
●The scene icon may not match actual shooting conditions, or it
may not be possible to shoot with your expected effect, color, or
brightness. In these cases, it is recommended that you shoot in
[] mode (=
77).
40
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
On-Screen Frames
Still Images Movies
In [ ] mode, a variety of frames are displayed once the camera
detects subjects you are aiming the camera at.
●A white frame is displayed around the subject (or person’s face)
determined by the camera to be the main subject, and gray frames are
displayed around other detected faces. Frames follow moving subjects
within a certain range to keep them in focus. However, if the camera
detects subject movement, only the white frame will remain on the
screen.
●When you are pressing the shutter button halfway and the camera
detects subject movement, a blue frame is displayed, and the focus
and image brightness are constantly adjusted (Servo AF).
●Depending on the shooting conditions and subject, no frames
may be displayed, frames may not be displayed around desired
subjects, or frames may be displayed on the background or
similar areas. In these cases, it is recommended that you shoot in
[] mode (=
77).
●To choose subjects to focus on, touch the desired subject on the
screen. [ ] is displayed, and the camera enters Touch AF mode
(=
93). Pressing the shutter button halfway will display a blue
frame, and the camera will keep the subject in focus and image
brightness adjusted (Servo AF).
Image Stabilization Icons
Still Images Movies
Optimal image stabilization for the shooting conditions (Intelligent IS) is
automatically applied, and the following icons are displayed.
Image stabilization for still images (Normal)
Image stabilization for still images when panning (Panning)*
Image stabilization for angular camera shake and shift-shake in
macro shots (Hybrid IS). For movies, [ ] is displayed and [ ]
image stabilization is also applied.
Image stabilization for movies, reducing strong camera shake, as
when recording while walking (Dynamic)
Image stabilization for slow camera shake, such as when
recording movies at telephoto (Powered)
No image stabilization, because the camera is mounted on
a tripod or held still by other means. However, during movie
recording, [ ] is displayed, and image stabilization to
counteract wind or other sources of vibration is used (Tripod IS).
* Displayed when you pan, following moving subjects with the camera. When you
follow subjects moving horizontally, image stabilization only counteracts vertical
camera shake, and horizontal stabilization stops. Similarly, when you follow
subjects moving vertically, image stabilization only counteracts horizontal camera
shake.
●To cancel image stabilization, set [IS Mode] to [Off] (=
52). In
this case, an IS icon is not displayed.
●In [ ] mode, no [ ] icon is displayed.
41
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●To deactivate digital zoom, choose MENU (=
30) ► [ 3] tab
► [Digital Zoom] ► [Off].
Shooting at Preset Focal Lengths (Step Zoom)
Still Images Movies
Shoot at common focal lengths in a range of 24 – 100 mm (35mm lm
equivalent).
zTo change the focal length from 24 to
28 mm, turn the [ ] ring counterclockwise
until it clicks. Turn the [ ] ring
counterclockwise to zoom in or clockwise
to zoom out.
●Step zoom is not available when recording movies even if you
turn the [ ] ring.
●When you are using digital zoom (=
41), you cannot adjust the
zoom factor by turning the [ ] ring counterclockwise. However,
you can set the focal length to 100 mm by turning it clockwise.
Changing the Way the Control of the Camera Feels with
the Step/Continuous Selection Lever
You can change how the control of the camera feels when you turn the
control ring.
zWhen you lower the selection lever, the
clicking of the control ring will stop and
you will be able to turn it smoothly.
Common, Convenient Features
Zooming In Closer on Subjects (Digital Zoom)
Still Images Movies
When distant subjects are too far away to enlarge using the optical zoom,
use digital zoom for up to about 17x enlargement.
1 Move the zoom lever toward [ ].
zHold the lever until zooming stops.
zZooming stops at the largest zoom factor
before the image becomes noticeably
grainy, which is then indicated on the
screen.
2 Move the zoom lever toward [ ]
again.
zThe camera zooms in even closer on the
subject.
z(1) is the current zoom factor.
●Moving the zoom lever will display the zoom bar (which indicates
the zoom position). The zoom bar is color-coded to indicate the
zoom range.
- White range: optical zoom range where the image will not
appear grainy.
- Yellow range: digital zoom range where the image is not
noticeably grainy (ZoomPlus).
- Blue range: digital zoom range where the image will appear
grainy.
●Because the blue range will not be available at some recording
pixel settings (=
97), the maximum zoom factor can be
achieved by following step 1.
(1)
42
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Using the Self-Timer
Still Images Movies
With the self-timer, you can include yourself in group photos or other
timed shots. The camera will shoot about 10 seconds after you press the
shutter button.
1 Congure the setting.
zPress the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose [ ] (=
29).
zOnce the setting is complete, [ ] is
displayed.
2 Shoot.
zFor Still Images: Press the shutter button
halfway to focus on the subject, and then
press it all the way down.
zFor Movies: Press the movie button.
zOnce you start the self-timer, the lamp
will blink and the camera will play a self-
timer sound.
zTwo seconds before the shot, the blinking
and sound will speed up. (The lamp will
remain lit in case the ash res.)
zTo cancel shooting after you have
triggered the self-timer, press the
[] button.
zTo restore the original setting, choose [ ]
in step 1.
Resizing the Subject with the Control Ring
Still Images Movies
By assigning seamless zoom to the control ring, you can further ne-tune
the size of the subject or zoom in or out faster than would be possible with
the zoom lever.
1 Congure the setting.
zPress the [ ] button.
zPress the [ ] or [ ][ ] buttons, or turn
the [ ] ring or the [ ] dial to choose [ ].
zPress the [ ] button to complete the
setting.
2 Compose the shot.
zTo adjust to telephoto, turn the [ ] ring
counterclockwise, and to adjust to wide
angle, turn it clockwise.
43
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●For movies recorded using the self-timer, recording begins after
your specied delay time, but specifying the number of shots has
no effect.
●When you specify multiple shots, image brightness and white
balance are determined by the rst shot. More time is required
between shots when the ash res or when you have specied
to take many shots. Shooting will stop automatically when the
memory card becomes full.
●When a delay longer than two seconds is specied, two seconds
before the shot, the lamp blinking and self-timer sound will speed
up. (The lamp will remain lit in case the ash res.)
Using the Self-Timer to Avoid Camera Shake
Still Images Movies
This option delays shutter release until about two seconds after you
have pressed the shutter button. If the camera is unsteady while you are
pressing the shutter button, it will not affect your shot.
zFollow step 1 in “Using the Self-Timer”
(=
42) and choose [ ].
zOnce the setting is complete, [ ] is
displayed.
Customizing the Self-Timer
Still Images Movies
You can specify the delay (0 – 30 seconds) and number of shots (1 – 10).
1 Choose [ ].
zFollowing step 1 in “Using the Self-Timer”
(=
42), choose [ ] and press the [ ]
button.
2 Congure the setting.
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the
delay time or number of shots.
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose a value, and then press the
[ ] button twice.
zOnce the setting is complete, [ ] is
displayed.
zFollow step 2 in “Using the Self-Timer”
(=
42) to shoot.
44
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Continuous Shooting
Still Images Movies
In [ ] mode, hold the shutter button all the way down to shoot
continuously.
For details on the continuous shooting speed, see “Camera” (=
217).
1 Congure the setting.
zPress the [ ] button, choose [ ] or [ ]
(either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[ ] dial), and then press the [ ] button.
zOnce the setting is complete, [ ] or [ ]
is displayed.
2 Shoot.
zHold the shutter button all the way down
to shoot continuously.
●During continuous shooting, the focus, exposure, and colors are
locked at the position/level determined when you pressed the
shutter button halfway.
●Cannot be used with the self-timer (=
42).
●Shooting may stop momentarily or continuous shooting may slow
down depending on shooting conditions, camera settings, and the
zoom position.
●As more shots are taken, shooting may slow down.
●Shooting may slow down if the ash res.
●With Touch Shutter (=
44), the camera shoots continuously
while you touch the screen. Focus and exposure during
continuous shooting remain constant, after they are determined
for the rst shot.
Shooting by Touching the Screen (Touch
Shutter)
Still Images Movies
With this option, instead of pressing the shutter button, you can simply
touch the screen and release your nger to shoot. The camera will focus
on subjects and adjust image brightness automatically.
1 Enable the Touch Shutter function.
zPress the [ ] button, choose [Touch
Shutter] on the [ 2] tab, and then
choose [Enable] (=
30).
2 Shoot.
zTouch the subject on the screen, and
then lift your nger immediately.
zThe camera shoots, as a shutter sound
is played.
zTo cancel Touch Shutter, choose [Disable]
in step 1.
●Even while the shot is displayed, you can prepare for the next
shot by touching [ ].
45
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Registering Face ID Information
You can register information (face info, names, and birthdays) for up to 12
people to use with Face ID.
1 Access the setting screen.
zPress the [ ] button, choose [Face
ID Settings] on the [ 2] tab, and then
press the [ ] button (=
30).
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Add to Registry], and then
press the [ ] button.
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Add a New Face], and
then press the [ ] button.
2 Register face information.
zAim the camera so that the face of the
person you want to register is inside the
gray frame at the center of the screen.
zA white frame on the person’s face
indicates that the face is recognized.
Make sure a white frame is displayed on
the face, and then shoot.
zIf the face is not recognized, you cannot
register face information.
Using Face ID
If you register a person ahead of time, the camera will detect that person’s
face, and prioritize focus, brightness, and color for that person when
shooting. In [ ] mode, the camera can detect babies and children
based on registered birthdays and optimize settings for them when
shooting.
This function is also useful when searching for a specic registered
person among a large number of images (=
115).
It is recommended to register information in advance so that images can
be selected easily for Story Highlights (=
136) albums.
Personal Information
●Information such as images of a face (face info) registered with
Face ID, and personal information (name, birthday) will be saved
on the camera. Additionally, when registered people are detected,
their names will be recorded in still images. When using the Face ID
function, be careful when sharing the camera or images with others,
and when posting images online where many others can view them.
●When disposing of a camera or transferring it to another person after
using Face ID, be sure to erase all information (registered faces,
names, and birthdays) from the camera (=
49).
46
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
5 Continue registering face
information.
zTo register up to 4 more points of face
information (expressions or angles),
repeat step 2.
zRegistered faces are more easily
recognized if you add a variety of face
information. In addition to a head-on
angle, add a slight side angle, a shot
when smiling, and shots inside and
outside.
●The ash will not re when following step 2.
●If you do not register a birthday in step 3, Babies or Children icons
(=
38) will not be displayed in [ ] mode.
●You can overwrite registered face info, and add face info later if
you have not lled all 5 face info slots (=
45).
Shooting
If you register a person ahead of time, the camera will prioritize that
person as the main subject, and optimize focus, brightness, and color for
that person when shooting.
zWhen you point the camera toward
people, the names of up to 3 registered
people will be displayed when they are
detected.
zShoot.
zDisplayed names will be recorded in still
images. The names of detected people
(maximum total of 5) will be recorded,
even if the names are not displayed.
zAfter [Register?] is displayed, press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [OK], and then press the [ ]
button.
zThe [Edit Prole] screen is displayed.
3 Register the person’s name and
birthday.
zPress the [ ] button to access the
keyboard, and then enter the name
(=
32).
zTo register a birthday, on the [Edit Prole]
screen, choose [Birthday] (either press
the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial),
and then press the [ ] button.
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
option.
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to specify the date.
zWhen nished, press the [ ] button.
4 Save the settings.
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Save], and then press the
[ ] button.
zAfter a message is displayed, press the
[][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [Yes], and then press the [ ]
button.
47
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Checking and Editing Registered Information
1 Access the [Check/Edit Info] screen.
zFollowing step 1 in “Registering Face ID
Information” (=
45), choose [Check/
Edit Info].
2 Choose a person to check or edit
their information.
zPress the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
the person whose information you want
to check or edit, and then press the
[ ] button.
3 Check or edit the information as
needed.
zTo check a name or birthday, choose [Edit
Prole] (either press the [ ][ ] buttons
or turn the [ ] dial), and then press the
[ ] button. On the screen displayed,
you can edit the name or birthday as
described in step 3 of “Registering Face
ID Information” (=
45).
zTo check face information, choose
[Face Info List] (either press the [ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and then
press the [ ] button. Press the [ ]
button on the screen displayed, choose
face information to erase by pressing
the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turning the
[ ] dial, and then press the [ ] button.
[Erase?] is displayed. To erase face
information, press the [ ][ ] buttons or
turn the [ ] dial to choose [OK], and then
press the [ ] button.
●People other than those registered may be mistakenly detected
as the registered person if they share similar facial features.
●Registered people may not be correctly detected if the captured
image or scene differs drastically from the registered face
information.
●If a registered face is not detected, or not easily detected,
overwrite registered information with new face info. Registering
face info right before shooting will allow for easier detection of
registered faces.
●If a person is mistakenly detected as another person and you
continue shooting, you can edit or erase the name recorded in the
image during playback (=
118).
●Because faces of babies and children change quickly as they
grow, you should update their face info regularly (=
45).
●Names will still be recorded in images even if you clear the
[Shooting Info] check box in “Customizing the Information
Displayed” (=
106) so that the names are not displayed.
●If you don’t want names to be recorded in images, choose [Face
ID Settings] on the [ 2] tab, choose [Face ID], and then choose
[Off].
●You can check names recorded in images in the playback screen
(simple information display) (=
112).
●Names recorded in continuous shooting (=
44) continue to be
recorded in the same position as the rst shot, even if subjects
move.
48
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3 Choose the face info to overwrite.
zPress the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose the face info to
overwrite, and then press the [ ] button.
4 Register face information.
zFollow step 2 in “Registering Face ID
Information” (=
45) to shoot, and then
register the new face information.
zRegistered faces are more easily
recognized if you add a variety of face
information. In addition to a head-on
angle, add a slight side angle, a shot
when smiling, and shots inside and
outside.
●You cannot add face information if all 5 information slots are lled.
Follow the steps above to overwrite face information.
●You can follow the above steps to register new face info when
there is at least one slot open; however, you cannot overwrite
any face information. Instead of overwriting face info, rst erase
unwanted existing info (=
49), and then register new face
information (=
45) as needed.
●Even if you change names in [Edit Prole], the names recorded in
previously shot images will remain the same.
Overwriting and Adding Face Information
You can overwrite existing face information with new face info. You should
update face information regularly, especially with babies and children, as
their faces change quickly as they grow.
You can also add face information when all 5 face info slots have not been
lled.
1 Access the [Add Face Info] screen.
zFollowing step 1 in “Registering Face ID
Information” (=
45), choose [Add Face
Info].
2 Choose a person to overwrite their
face info.
zPress the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
the name of the person whose face info
you want to overwrite, and then press the
[ ] button.
zIf ve items of face info have already
been registered, a message will be
displayed. Choose [OK] (either press the
[][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
then press the [ ] button.
zIf less than ve items of face info are
registered, go to step 4 to add face
information.
49
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Image Customization Features
Changing the Aspect Ratio
Still Images Movies
Change the image aspect ratio (ratio of width to height) as follows.
zPress the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(=
29).
zOnce the setting is complete, the screen
aspect ratio will be updated.
zTo restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [ ].
Used for display on widescreen HDTVs or similar display devices.
Native aspect ratio of the camera screen. Same aspect ratio as
35mm lm. Used for printing images at 5 x 7-inch or postcard
sizes.
Used for display on standard-denition televisions or similar
display devices. Also used for printing images at 3.5 x 5-inch or
A-series sizes.
Square aspect ratio.
●Not available in [ ] mode.
●You can also congure this setting by choosing MENU (=
30)
► [ 1] tab ► [Still Image Aspect Ratio].
Erasing Registered Information
You can erase information (face info, names, and birthdays) registered to
Face ID. However, names recorded in previously shot images will not be
erased.
1 Access the [Erase Info] screen.
zFollow step 1 in “Registering Face ID
Information” (=
45) and choose [Erase
Info].
2 Choose a person to erase their
information.
zPress the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
the name of the person to erase, and
then press the [ ] button.
zAfter [Erase?] is displayed, press the
[][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [OK], and then press the [ ]
button.
●If you erase a registered person’s info, you will not be able to
display their name (=
114), overwrite their info (=
118), or
search for images that include them (=
115).
●You can also erase names in image information (=
119).
50
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Changing Movie Image Quality
Still Images Movies
Adjust movie image quality (image size and frame rate). The frame rate
indicates how many frames are recorded per second, which is determined
automatically based on the NTSC or PAL setting (=
170). For guidelines
on the total recording time for movies at each level of image quality
that will t on a memory card, see “Recording Time per Memory Card”
(=
220).
zPress the [ ] button, choose the movie
quality menu item, and then choose the
desired option (=
29).
zThe option you congured is now
displayed.
For NTSC Video
Image
Quality
Number of
Recording Pixels Frame Rate Details
1920 x 1080 59.94 fps For shooting in Full
HD. [ ] enables
movies with smoother
motion.
1920 x 1080 29.97 fps
1920 x 1080 23.98 fps
1280 x 720 29.97 fps For shooting in HD.
640 x 480 29.97 fps For shooting in
standard denition.
Changing Image Quality
Still Images Movies
Choose from 4 levels of image quality. For guidelines on how many of
each kind of image can t on a memory card, see “Number of Shots per
Memory Card” (=
220).
zPress the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(=
29).
zThe option you congured is now
displayed.
zTo restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [ ].
When deciding the number of pixels based on print size, use the following
table as a guide for images with a 3:2 aspect ratio.
A2 (16.5 x 23.4 in.)
A3 (11.7 x 16.5 in.)
A4 (8.3 x 11.7 in.)
3.5 x 5 in., 5 x 7 in., Postcard
●Not available in [ ] mode.
●You can also change the image quality by accessing MENU
(=
30) ► [ 1] tab ► [Image quality].
51
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Helpful Shooting Features
Using the Dual Axis Electronic Level
Still Images Movies
An electronic level can be displayed as a guideline to ensure the camera
is level from front to back and left to right.
1 Display the electronic level.
zPress the [ ] button several times to
display the electronic level.
2 Straighten the camera.
z(1) indicates the front-back orientation
and (2) the left-right orientation.
zIf the camera is tilted, move it so that the
red line changes to green.
●If the electronic level is not displayed in step 1, press the
[] button and check the setting in [ 1] tab ► [Shooting
information display].
●The electronic level is not displayed during movie recording.
●If you hold the camera vertically, the orientation of the electronic
level will be updated automatically to match the camera
orientation.
●Calibrate the electronic level if it seems ineffective in helping you
level the camera (=
170).
●Not available in [ ] mode.
(
1
) (
2
)
For PAL Video
Image
Quality
Number of
Recording Pixels Frame Rate Details
1920 x 1080 50.00 fps For shooting in Full
HD.
1920 x 1080 25.00 fps
1280 x 720 25.00 fps For shooting in HD.
640 x 480 25.00 fps For shooting in
standard denition.
●There are black bars displayed on the left and right in [ ]
and [ ] modes and on the top and bottom in [ ],
[], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], and
[] modes. They indicate that this image area cannot be
recorded.
●You can also congure this setting by choosing MENU
(=
30) ► [ 7] tab ► [Movie rec. size].
52
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Changing the IS Mode Settings
Deactivating Image Stabilization
Still Images Movies
When the camera is held still (as when shooting from a tripod), you should
set image stabilization to [Off] to deactivate it.
1 Access the setting screen.
zPress the [ ] button, choose [IS
Settings] on the [ 4] tab, and then press
the [ ] button (=
30).
2 Congure the setting.
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[ ] dial to choose [IS Mode], press the
[ ] button, and then press the [ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose the
desired option (=
30).
Continuous Optimal image stabilization for the shooting conditions
is automatically applied (Intelligent IS) (=
40).
Off Deactivates image stabilization.
Deactivating Auto Level
Still Images Movies
Normally, auto leveling keeps movies straight during recording. To cancel
this feature, choose [Disable].
zPress the [ ] button, choose
[ Auto level] on the [ 4] tab, and then
press the [ ] button (=
30).
zChoose [Disable], and press the [ ]
button again (=
30).
●Once movie recording begins, the image display area changes
and subjects are enlarged (=
53).
53
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Customizing Camera Operation
Customize shooting functions on the [ ] tab of the menu screen as
follows.
For instructions on menu functions, see “Using the Menu Screen”
(=
30).
Preventing the AF-Assist Beam from Firing
Still Images Movies
You can deactivate the lamp that normally lights up to help you focus
when you press the shutter button halfway in low-light conditions.
zPress the [ ] button, choose [AF-
assist Beam] on the [ 4] tab, and then
choose [Off].
zTo restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [On].
Recording Movies with Subjects at the Same
Size Shown before Shooting
Still Images Movies
Normally, once movie recording begins, the image display area changes
and subjects are enlarged to allow for image straightening and correction
of signicant camera shake.
To record movies with subjects at the same size shown before shooting,
you can reduce image stabilization and cancel Auto Level.
zSet [ Auto level] to [Disable] as
described in “Deactivating Auto Level”
(=
52).
zFollow step 1 in “Deactivating Image
Stabilization” (=
52) to access the [IS
Settings] screen.
zChoose [Dynamic IS], and then choose
[Low] (=
30).
●You can also set [IS Mode] to [Off], so that subjects are recorded
at the same size shown before shooting.
●[Dynamic IS] is not available when [IS Mode] is set to [Off]
(=
52).
●Only [Standard] is available when the movie quality is [ ]
(NTSC) or [ ] (PAL).
54
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Changing the Image Display Style after Shots
Still Images Movies
You can change how long images are displayed after shots.
zPress the [ ] button, choose
[Image review] on the [ 1] tab, and then
choose the desired option.
zTo restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [2 sec.].
2 sec.,
4 sec.,
8 sec.
Displays images for the specied time. Even while the
shot is displayed, you can take another shot by pressing
the shutter button halfway again.
Hold Displays images until you press the shutter button
halfway.
Off No image display after shots.
●By pressing the [ ] button while an image is displayed after
shooting, you can switch the display information.
Preventing the Red-Eye Reduction Lamp from
Lighting Up
Still Images Movies
You can deactivate the red-eye reduction lamp that lights up to reduce
red-eye when the ash is used in low-light shots.
1 Access the [Flash Settings] screen.
zPress the [ ] button, choose [Flash
Settings] on the [ 5] tab, and then press
the [ ] button.
2 Congure the setting.
zChoose [Red-Eye Lamp], and then
choose [Off].
zTo restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [On].
55
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Specic Scenes
Choose a mode matching the shooting scene, and the camera will
automatically congure the settings for optimal shots.
1 Enter [ ] mode.
zSet the mode dial to [ ].
2 Choose a shooting mode.
zPress the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose a shooting mode
(=
29).
3 Shoot.
●Turn the mode dial to [ ]. You can also choose the shooting
mode by touching [ ] in the upper left.
Other Shooting Modes
Shoot more effectively in various scenes, and
take shots enhanced with unique image effects or
captured using special functions
56
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
●Subjects appear larger in [ ] mode compared to other modes.
●In [ ] and [ ] mode, shots may look grainy because the ISO
speed (=
80) is increased to suit the shooting conditions.
●Because the camera will shoot continuously in [ ] mode, hold it
steady while shooting.
●In [ ] mode, excessive motion blur or certain shooting conditions
may prevent you from obtaining the desired results.
●In [ ] mode, mount the camera on a tripod or take other
measures to keep it still and prevent camera shake. Additionally,
you should set [IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod or other
means to secure the camera (=
52).
●When you use a tripod for evening scenes, shooting in [ ]
mode instead of [ ] mode will give better results (=
34).
●You can also choose the shooting mode by accessing MENU
(=
30) ► [ 1] tab ► [Rec. Mode].
●In [ ] mode, although no frames are displayed when you press
the shutter button halfway, optimal focus is still determined.
Shooting Portraits (Portrait)
Still Images Movies
zTake shots of people with a softening
effect.
Shooting Evening Scenes without
Using a Tripod (Handheld Night
Scene)
Still Images Movies
zBeautiful shots of evening scenes or
portraits with evening scenery in the
background, without the need to hold the
camera very still (as with a tripod).
zA single image is created by combining
consecutive shots, reducing camera
shake and image noise.
Shooting Underwater (Underwater)
Still Images Movies
zNatural-colored shots of sea life and
underwater scenery, when you use an
optional waterproof case (=
178).
zThis mode can correct white balance and
match the effect of using a commercially
available color-compensating lter
(=
57).
Shooting Fireworks (Fireworks)
Still Images Movies
zVivid shots of reworks.
57
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
●
In [ ] mode, optical zoom is set to maximum wide angle.
●In [ ] mode, use of digital zoom may cause images to appear
grainy at some recording pixel settings (=
97).
●In [ ] mode, subjects at close range may not be in focus. In
this case, try setting the focus range to [ ].
●You can also congure this setting by pressing the [ ] button,
touching the desired focus range, and then touching it again.
Correcting White Balance
Still Images Movies
White balance can be manually corrected in [ ] mode (=
55). This
adjustment can match the effect of using a commercially available color-
compensating lter.
1 Choose [ ].
zFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(=
55) and choose [ ].
2 Choose white balance.
zPress the [ ] button, and then choose
[ ] in the menu.
3 Adjust the setting.
zTurn the [ ] ring to adjust the correction
level for B and A, and then press the [ ]
button.
zOnce the setting is complete, [ ] is
displayed.
Using Functions for Underwater Shots
Shooting with an Underwater Focus Range
Still Images Movies
If focusing is difcult in [ ] mode (=
55) with a focus range of [ ],
using a focus range designed for underwater shooting can ensure optimal
underwater shots.
1 Congure the setting.
zFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(=
55) and choose [ ].
zPress the [ ] button, choose the desired
focus range (either press the [ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and then
press the [ ] button.
2 Shoot.
Focus range Description
Underwater
Macro
Take close-ups of sea life, using the digital zoom
for even closer shots.
Quick
Avoid missing unexpected underwater shooting
opportunities when shooting subjects some
distance away. Especially effective for moving
subjects.
Manual
Focus Focus on subjects manually (=
87).
Refer to “Shooting Range” (=
219) for details on the range of each
focus range.
58
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Applying Special Effects
Add a variety of effects to images when shooting.
Shooting Yourself under Optimal Settings
(Self Portrait)
For self-portraits, customizable image processing includes skin smoothing
as well as brightness and background adjustment to make yourself stand
out.
1 Choose [ ].
zFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(=
55) and choose [ ].
2 Open the screen.
zOpen the screen as shown.
3 Congure the setting.
zOn the screen, touch the icon of the
setting to congure.
zChoose the desired option.
zTo return to the previous screen, touch
[].
4 Shoot.
●B represents blue, and A represents amber.
●White balance can also be manually corrected by recording
custom white balance data (=
83) before following the
preceding steps.
59
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Shooting Images with the Background Blurred
to Convey a Sense of Speed (Panning)
Still Images Movies
By panning, you can shoot blurred backgrounds that convey a sense of
speed.
The camera will detect blurring of the subject and correct it, so you can
reduce blurring of the subject.
1 Choose [ ].
zFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(=
55) and choose [ ].
2 Shoot.
zBefore shooting, with the shutter button
pressed halfway, move the camera so
that it follows the subject.
zWith the moving subject in the center of
the screen, press the shutter button all
the way down.
zMove the camera so that it continues to
follow the subject even after you have
pressed the shutter button all the way
down.
●Try taking some test shots rst, to make sure you obtain the
desired results.
●To adjust the effect level, turn the [ ] ring.
●When shooting, keep your arms close to your body and hold the
camera with both hands steadily, and turn your whole body to
follow subjects.
●The effect is more apparent when you follow subjects moving
horizontally such as trains or cars.
Item Details
Choose from [ ] or one of six levels of background
defocusing.
Choose from ve levels of brightness.
Choose from ve levels of skin smoothing. Skin smoothing
is optimized for the main subject’s face.
To use Touch Shutter, choose [ ].
●Areas other than people’s skin may be modied, depending on
the shooting conditions.
●Try taking some test shots rst to make sure you obtain the
desired results.
●In [ ] ash mode, background defocusing is set to [ ] and
cannot be changed.
●In [ ] mode, the time left before shooting is shown on the top of
the screen when you activate the self-timer by selecting [ ], or
by selecting [ ] and setting the time to 3 seconds or more.
60
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Adding Artistic Effects
zFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(=
55) and choose [ ].
zTurn the [ ] ring to choose an effect.
zA preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
Natural Images are natural and organic.
Art Standard Images resemble paintings, with subdued contrast.
Art Vivid Images resemble vivid illustrations.
Art Bold Images resemble oil paintings, with bold edges.
Art Embossed Images resemble old photos, with bold edges and
dark ambiance.
Shooting with a Fish-Eye Lens Effect
(Fish-Eye Effect)
Still Images Movies
Shoot with the distorting effect of a sh-eye lens.
1 Choose [ ].
zFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(=
55) and choose [ ].
2 Choose an effect level.
zTurn the [ ] ring to choose an effect
level.
zA preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
3 Shoot.
Shooting High-Contrast Scenes
(High Dynamic Range)
Still Images Movies
Three consecutive images are captured at different brightness levels
each time you shoot, and the camera combines image areas with optimal
brightness to create a single image. This mode can reduce the washed-
out highlights and loss of detail in shadows that tend to occur in high-
contrast shots.
1 Choose [ ].
zFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(=
55) and choose [ ].
zThe subject appears slightly enlarged.
2 Shoot.
zHold the camera steady as you shoot.
When you press the shutter button all
the way down, the camera will take three
shots and combine them.
●Excessive motion blur or certain shooting conditions may prevent
you from obtaining the desired results.
●If excessive camera shake interferes with shooting, mount
the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it still.
Additionally, you should set [IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod
or other means to secure the camera (=
52).
●Any subject movement will cause images to look blurry.
●There will be a delay before you can shoot again, as the camera
processes and combines the images.
●[] may be displayed when you press the shutter button halfway
in bright conditions, indicating automatic adjustment for optimal
image brightness.
61
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Shots Resembling Watercolors
(Water Painting Effect)
Still Images Movies
Soften colors, for photos resembling watercolor paintings.
1 Choose [ ].
zFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(=
55) and choose [ ].
2 Choose an effect level.
zTurn the [ ] ring to choose an effect
level.
zA preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
3 Shoot.
●Try taking some test shots rst, to make sure you obtain the
desired results.
Shots Resembling Oil Paintings
(Art Bold Effect)
Still Images Movies
Make subjects look more substantial, like subjects in oil paintings.
1 Choose [ ].
zFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(=
55) and choose [ ].
2 Choose an effect level.
zTurn the [ ] ring to choose an effect
level.
zA preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
3 Shoot.
62
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Speed and Estimated Playback Time
(for One-Minute Clips)
Speed Playback Time
Approx. 12 sec.
Approx. 6 sec.
Approx. 3 sec.
Movies are played back at 30 fps.
●The zoom is not available when recording movies. Be sure to set
the zoom before shooting.
●Try taking some test shots rst, to make sure you obtain the
desired results.
●To switch the orientation of the frame to vertical, press the [ ][ ]
buttons in step 2. To return the frame to horizontal orientation,
press the [ ][ ] buttons.
●To move the frame when it is in horizontal orientation, press the
[][ ] buttons, and to move the frame when it is in vertical
orientation, press the [ ][ ] buttons.
●Holding the camera vertically will change the orientation of the
frame.
●Movie image quality is [ ] at an aspect ratio of [ ] and [ ] at
an aspect ratio of [ ] (=
49). These quality settings cannot
be changed.
●You can also move the frame by touching or dragging across the
screen.
Shots Resembling Miniature Models
(Miniature Effect)
Still Images Movies
Creates the effect of a miniature model, by blurring image areas above
and below your selected area.
You can also make movies that look like scenes in miniature models by
choosing the playback speed before the movie is recorded. People and
objects in the scene will move quickly during playback. Note that sound is
not recorded.
1 Choose [ ].
zFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(=
55) and choose [ ].
zA white frame is displayed, indicating the
image area that will not be blurred.
2 Choose the area to keep in focus.
zPress the [ ] button.
zMove the zoom lever to resize the frame,
and turn the [ ] dial to move it.
3 For movies, choose the movie
playback speed.
zTurn the [ ] ring to choose the speed.
4 Return to the shooting screen and
shoot.
zPress the [ ] button to return to the
shooting screen, and then shoot.
63
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Making Subjects Stand Out
(Background Defocus)
Still Images Movies
You can shoot subjects so that they stand out from the background.
Two consecutive images are captured with settings optimized for
background defocus. The background is defocused through lens effects
and subject- and scene-based image processing.
1 Choose [ ].
zFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(=
55) and choose [ ].
2 Shoot.
zHold the camera steady as you shoot.
Two consecutive images are captured
when you press the shutter button all the
way down.
zA blinking [ ] icon indicates that the
images could not be processed.
●Excessive motion blur or certain shooting conditions may prevent
you from obtaining the desired results.
●For the best results with background defocusing, try shooting
close to the subject, and ensure ample distance between the
subject and background.
●There may be a delay after shooting before you can shoot again.
●To adjust the effect level, turn the [ ] ring.
Shooting with a Toy Camera Effect
(Toy Camera Effect)
Still Images Movies
This effect makes images resemble shots from a toy camera by vignetting
(darker, blurred image corners) and changing the overall color.
1 Choose [ ].
zFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(=
55) and choose [ ].
2 Choose a color tone.
zTurn the [ ] ring to choose a color tone.
zA preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
3 Shoot.
Standard Shots resemble toy camera images.
Warm Images have a warmer tone than with [Standard].
Cool Images have a cooler tone than with [Standard].
●Try taking some test shots rst, to make sure you obtain the
desired results.
64
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Shooting in Monochrome (Grainy B/W)
Still Images Movies
Take monochrome pictures with a gritty, rough feeling.
1 Choose [ ].
zFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(=
55) and choose [ ].
2 Choose an effect level.
zTurn the [ ] ring to choose an effect
level.
zA preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
3 Shoot.
Shooting with a Soft Focus Effect
Still Images Movies
This function allows you to shoot images as if a soft focus lter were
attached to the camera. You can adjust the effect level as desired.
1 Choose [ ].
zFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(=
55) and choose [ ].
2 Choose an effect level.
zTurn the [ ] ring to choose an effect
level.
zA preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
3 Shoot.
●Try taking some test shots rst, to make sure you obtain the
desired results.
65
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
4 Shoot.
zPress the shutter button. The ash res
as the camera takes the rst shot.
zThe second and third shots are now
taken, without ring the ash.
5 Have the person stay still until the
lamp blinks.
zThe person you are shooting should stay
still until the lamp blinks three times after
the third shot, which may take up to about
two seconds.
zAll the shots are combined to create a
single image.
●Under some shooting conditions, images may not look as
expected.
●For better shots, have the person stand away from illumination
such as street lights, and make sure the ash is raised.
●There will be a delay before you can shoot again, as the camera
processes the images.
●To avoid blurry shots, make sure the person you shoot in steps
4 – 5 stays still.
Special Modes for Other Purposes
Shooting Starry Skies (Star)
Shooting People against Starry Skies (Star Portrait)
Still Images Movies
Capture beautiful shots of people against starry skies. After initially ring
the ash to capture the person, the camera shoots twice without ash.
The three images are combined into a single image and processed to
make the stars more prominent.
For details on the ash range, see “Camera” (=
217).
1 Choose [ ].
zFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(=
55) and choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [ ], and then press the
[ ] button.
zZoom is set to maximum wide angle and
cannot be adjusted.
2 Raise the ash.
zMove the [ ] switch to raise the ash.
3 Secure the camera.
zMount the camera on a tripod or take
other measures to keep it still.
66
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Shooting Night Scenes under Starry Skies (Star Nightscape)
Still Images Movies
Capture impressive shots of starry skies above night scenes. Starlight in
the image is automatically enhanced, making starry skies look beautiful.
1 Choose [ ].
zFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(=
55) and choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [ ], and then press the
[ ] button.
zZoom is set to maximum wide angle and
cannot be adjusted.
2 Secure the camera.
zMount the camera on a tripod or take
other measures to keep it still and
prevent camera shake.
3 Shoot.
●There will be a delay before you can shoot again, as the camera
processes the images.
●For easier viewing, try choosing MENU ► [ 2] tab ► [Night
Display] ► [On] (=
172) before shooting.
●To adjust subject brightness, try changing the ash exposure
compensation (=
96).
●To adjust background brightness, try changing the exposure
compensation (=
78). However, images may not look as
expected under some shooting conditions, and the person should
stay still in steps 4 – 5, which may take up to about 15 seconds.
●To capture more stars and brighter starlight, choose MENU
(=
30) ► [ 7] tab ► [Star Portrait Settings] ► [Star Visibility]
► [Prominent]. However, images may not look as expected under
some shooting conditions, and the person should stay still in
steps 4 – 5, which may take up to about 8 seconds.
●To make stars brighter, choose MENU (=
30) ► [ 7] tab ►
[Star Emphasis] ► [Sharp]. To emphasize the bright stars in a
starry sky, set [Star Emphasis] to [Soft]. This setting can produce
eye-catching shots by enlarging bright stars while de-emphasizing
dimmer stars. To disable starlight processing, select [Off].
67
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
3 Secure the camera.
zMount the camera on a tripod or take
other measures to keep it still.
4 Shoot.
zPress the shutter button all the way
down. [Busy] is displayed briey, and
then shooting begins.
zDo not disturb the camera while shooting.
zTo cancel shooting, press the shutter
button all the way down again. Note
that cancellation may take up to about
30 seconds.
●If the camera runs out of battery power, shooting stops and a
composite image created from the images up to that point is
saved.
●There will be a delay before you can shoot again, as the camera
processes the images.
●For easier viewing, try choosing MENU ► [ 2] tab ► [Night
Display] ► [On] (=
172) before shooting.
●Try switching to manual focus mode (=
71, =
87) to more
accurately specify the focal position before shooting.
●For easier viewing, try choosing MENU ► [ 2] tab ► [Night
Display] ► [On] (=
172) before shooting.
●To make stars brighter, choose MENU (=
30) ► [ 5] tab ►
[Star Emphasis] ► [Sharp]. To emphasize the bright stars in a
starry sky, set [Star Emphasis] to [Soft]. This setting can produce
eye-catching shots by enlarging bright stars while de-emphasizing
dimmer stars. To disable starlight processing, select [Off].
●Try switching to manual focus mode (=
71, =
87) to more
accurately specify the focal position before shooting.
Shooting Star Trails (Star Trails)
Still Images Movies
Streaks created by the movement of stars through the sky are recorded in
a single image. After determining the shutter speed and number of shots,
the camera shoots continuously. A shooting session can last up to about
two hours. Check the battery level in advance.
1 Choose [ ].
zFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(=
55) and choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [ ], and then press the
[ ] button.
zZoom is set to maximum wide angle and
cannot be adjusted.
2 Specify the duration of the shooting
session.
zTurn the [ ] ring to choose the shooting
duration.
68
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
4 Check the brightness.
zPress the shutter button all the way down
to shoot a single still image.
zSwitch to Playback mode (=
110) and
check image brightness.
zTo adjust brightness, turn the exposure
compensation dial and change the
exposure level on the shooting screen.
Check brightness again by taking another
shot.
5 Shoot.
zPress the movie button. Recording
begins, and the indicator on the back of
the camera blinks.
zDo not disturb the camera while shooting.
zTo cancel shooting, press the movie
button again. Note that cancellation may
take up to about 30 seconds.
zThe camera operates in Eco mode
(=
171) while shooting.
Shooting Movies of Star Movement (Star Time-Lapse Movie)
Still Images Movies
By recording a time-lapse movie that combines images shot at a specied
interval, you can create movies with fast-moving stars. You can adjust the
shooting interval and recording duration as needed.
Note that each session takes a long time, and requires many shots. Check
the battery level and memory card space in advance.
1 Choose [ ].
zFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(=
55) and choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [ ], and then press the
[ ] button.
zZoom is set to maximum wide angle and
cannot be adjusted.
2 Congure movie settings.
zPress the [ ] button.
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an item, and then choose
the desired option.
3 Secure the camera.
zMount the camera on a tripod or take
other measures to keep it still.
69
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Estimated playback time based on shooting interval and frame rate (for a
one-hour session)
Interval between Shots Frame Rate Playback Time
NTSC PAL
15 sec. 16 sec.
15 sec. 8 sec.
30 sec. 8 sec.
30 sec. 4 sec.
1 min. 4 sec.
1 min. 2 sec.
●There will be a delay before you can shoot again, as the camera
processes the images.
●If the camera runs out of battery power or memory card space,
shooting stops and a movie created from the images up to that
point is saved.
●A shooting interval of [1 min.] is not available with these effects:
[], [ ], [ ], or [ ].
Item Options Details
Save Stills Enable/Disable
You can choose to save
each shot collected before
the movie is created. When
[Enable] is selected, you
cannot use [Effect].
Effect Choose movie effects,
such as star trails.
Shot Interval 15 sec., 30 sec.,
1 min.
Choose the interval
between each shot.
Frame Rate , (NTSC)
, (PAL)
Choose the movie frame
rate.
Shooting Time 60 min., 90 min.,
120 min., Unlimited
Choose the length of
the recording session.
To record until the
battery runs out, choose
[Unlimited].
Auto exposure Lock to 1st shot/
For each shot
You can choose to lock to
the rst shot’s exposure or
change the exposure for
each shot.
70
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Adjusting Colors
Still Images Movies
Colors can be manually adjusted in [ ] mode.
1 Choose a shooting mode.
zChoose [ ] (=
65), [ ] (=
66),
[ ] (=
67), or [ ] (=
68).
2 Choose color adjustment.
zPress the [ ] button, and then choose
[ ] in the menu (=
29).
3 Adjust the setting.
zTurn the [ ] ring or press the [ ][ ]
buttons to adjust the correction level for B
and A, and then press the [ ] button.
zOnce the setting is complete, [ ] is
displayed.
●B represents blue, and A represents amber.
●Skin tones remain the same when you adjust colors in [ ] mode.
●Advanced settings can be accessed by pressing the [ ]
button when the screen in step 2 is displayed (=
83).
●You can also choose the correction level by touching or dragging
the bar in step 2.
●Sound is not recorded.
●For easier viewing, try choosing MENU ► [ 2] tab ► [Night
Display] ► [On] (=
172) before shooting.
●You can also access the screen in step 2 by choosing MENU
(=
30) ► [ 5] tab ► [Star Time-Lapse Movie Setting].
●Images saved with [Save Stills] set to [Enable] are managed
as a single group, and during playback, only the rst image is
displayed. To indicate that the image is part of a group, [ ]
is displayed in the upper left of the screen. If you erase a grouped
image (=
123), all images in the group are also erased. Be
careful when erasing images.
●Grouped images can be played back individually (=
117) and
ungrouped (=
117).
●Protecting (=
121) a grouped image will protect all images in
the group.
●Grouped images can be viewed individually when played
back using Image Search (=
115). In this case, images are
temporarily ungrouped.
●The following actions are not available for grouped images:
editing Face ID information (=
118), magnifying (=
119),
tagging as favorites (=
126), editing (=
128), printing
(=
184), setting up individual image printing (=
188), or
adding to a photobook (=
190). To do these things, either
view grouped images individually (=
117) or cancel grouping
(=
117) rst.
●Try switching to manual focus mode (=
71, =
87) to more
accurately specify the focal position before shooting.
71
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
●The focus may not be adjusted under the following conditions. In
this case, try again from step 3.
- There is a bright light source
- Airplanes or other light sources or clouds crossed the sky
●If adjustment fails, focus returns to the original position.
Adjusting the Focus
Still Images Movies
Automatically adjust the focus to suit starry skies.
1 Choose a shooting mode.
zChoose [ ] (=
66), [ ] (=
67), or
[ ] (=
68).
2 Secure the camera.
zMount the camera on a tripod or take
other measures to keep it still.
3 Frame the stars to capture.
zPress the [ ] button, choose [ ] (either
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial), and then press the [ ] button.
zPress the [ ] button.
zTilt the camera so that the stars to
capture are inside the frame displayed.
4 Adjust the focus.
zPress the [ ] button. [Adjusting star
focus] is displayed, and adjustment
begins.
zAdjustment may take about 20 seconds.
Do not move the camera until
[Adjustment completed] is displayed.
zPress the [ ] button.
5 Shoot (=
66, =
67, =
68).
72
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Locking or Changing Image Brightness before recording
Still Images Movies
You can lock the exposure before or during recording or adjust it in 1/3-
stop increments within a range of −3 to +3 stops.
1 Lock the exposure.
zTouch [ ] to lock the exposure.
zTo unlock the exposure, touch [ ] again.
2 Adjust the exposure.
zTurn the exposure compensation dial.
3 Shoot (=
72).
Recording Various Movies
Recording Movies in [ ] Mode
Still Images Movies
1 Enter [ ] mode.
zSet the mode dial to [ ].
zPress the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose [ ] (=
29).
zBlack bars are displayed on the top and
bottom edges of the screen, and the
subject is slightly enlarged. The black
bars indicate image areas not recorded.
2 Congure the settings to suit the
movie (=
200).
3 Shoot.
zPress the movie button.
zTo stop movie recording, press the movie
button again.
●You can also choose the shooting mode by accessing MENU
(=
30) ► [ 1] tab ► [Rec. Mode].
●Focus can be adjusted during recording by touching [ ] and
pressing the [ ][ ] buttons while [ ] is displayed.
73
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Correcting Severe Camera Shake
Still Images Movies
Counteract severe camera shake, such as when recording while moving.
The portion of images displayed changes more than for [Standard], and
subjects are further enlarged.
zFollow the steps in “Recording Movies
with Subjects at the Same Size Shown
before Shooting” (=
53) to choose
[High].
●[Dynamic IS] is not available when [IS Mode] is set to [Off].
●Only [Standard] is available when the movie quality is [ ]
(NTSC) or [ ] (PAL).
Sound Settings
Still Images Movies
Deactivating the Wind Filter
Noise caused by strong wind can be reduced. However, the recording
may sound unnatural when this option is used when there is no wind. In
this case, you can deactivate the wind lter.
zPress the [ ] button, choose [Wind
Filter] on the [ 8] tab, and then press
the [ ] button (=
30).
zChoose [Off] (=
30).
Disabling Auto Slow Shutter
Still Images Movies
Auto slow shutter can be disabled if movement in movies is rough.
However, under low light, movies may look dark.
zPress the [ ] button, choose
[ Auto slow shutter] on the [ 8]
tab, and then choose [A-SLOW OFF]
(=
30).
zTo restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [A-SLOW ON].
●Auto slow shutter is only available for [ ] and [ ]
movies.
74
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Effects
2x Playback in fast motion
1x Playback at normal speed
1/2x Playback in slow motion
Normal playback with the last two seconds rewound and
played again in slow motion
●Sound is not recorded in these clips.
●The movie quality is [ ] (for NTSC) or [ ] (for PAL)
(=
50, =
51) and cannot be changed.
●During [ ] recording, a mark indicating the last two seconds is
added to the bar showing the elapsed time.
Shooting Time-Lapse Movies (Time-Lapse Movie)
Still Images Movies
By recording a time-lapse movie that combines images shot at a specied
interval, you can create a movie. You can view subject changes, such as
landscape changes, in fast-forward. You can adjust the shooting interval
and number of shots as needed.
1 Choose [ ].
zSet the mode dial to [ ].
zPress the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose [ ] (=
29).
zBlack bars are displayed on the top
and bottom edges of the screen. They
indicate that this image area cannot be
recorded.
Using the Attenuator
The attenuator can reduce audio distortion in noisy environments.
However, in quiet environments, it lowers the sound-recording level.
zPress the [ ] button, choose
[Attenuator] on the [ 8] tab, and then
press the [ ] button (=
30).
zChoose an option as desired (=
30).
Recording Short Clips
Still Images Movies
Apply playback effects to brief clips of a few seconds, such as fast motion,
slow motion, or replay. Clips recorded in this mode may be included in
Story Highlights albums (=
136).
1 Enter [ ] mode.
zSet the mode dial to [ ].
zPress the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose [ ] (=
29).
zBlack bars displayed on the top and
bottom edges of the screen. They indicate
that this image area cannot be recorded.
2 Specify the shooting time and
playback effect.
zPress the [ ] button.
zTurn the [ ] dial to set the shooting time
(4 – 6 sec.), and press the [ ][ ] buttons
to set the playback effect (=
74).
3 Shoot (=
72).
zA bar showing the elapsed time is
displayed.
75
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Item Details
Shooting scene Choose from three types of scenes.
Interval/ Shots Choose the number of shots per specied seconds.
Auto exposure You can choose to lock to the rst shot’s exposure
or change the exposure for each shot.
Review image Play the movie immediately after it is shot for a
maximum of 2 seconds.
Item Details
Time required
Time required for shooting. The time varies
depending on interval/shots.
- Scene 1: Maximum of 1 hour
- Scene 2 and 3: Maximum of 2 hours
Playback time Playback time of the movie created from still
images.
●If you shoot fast-moving subjects, they may look distorted.
●Sound is not recorded.
●Focal position during shooting remains constant, after it is
determined for the rst shot.
●The movie quality is [ ] and cannot be changed.
●The frame rate of time-lapse movies varies depending on
the video system (=
170) setting and cannot be changed:
[] for NTSC and [ ] for PAL.
●You can also congure the settings by choosing MENU
(=
30) ► [ 7] tab ► [Time-lapse movie settings].
2 Congure movie settings.
zPress the [ ] button.
zChoose an item (either press the [ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial), choose the
desired option, and then press the
[ ] button.
3 Secure the camera.
zMount the camera on a tripod or take
other measures to keep it still.
4 Shoot.
zTo start shooting, press the movie button.
zDo not disturb the camera while shooting.
zTo cancel shooting, press the movie
button again.
zThe camera operates in Eco mode
(=
171) while shooting.
76
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Recording iFrame Movies
Still Images Movies
Record movies that can be edited with iFrame-compatible software or
devices.
1 Choose [ ].
zSet the mode dial to [ ].
zPress the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose [ ] (=
29).
zBlack bars displayed on the top and
bottom edges of the screen. They
indicate that this image area cannot be
recorded.
2 Shoot (=
72).
●iFrame is a video format developed by Apple Inc.
●The movie quality is [ ] (for NTSC) or [ ] (for PAL)
(=
50, =
51) and cannot be changed.
77
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Shooting in Program AE ([P] Mode)
Still Images Movies
You can customize many function settings to suit your preferred shooting
style.
1 Enter [ ] mode.
zSet the mode dial to [ ].
2 Customize the settings as desired
(=
78 – =
99), and then shoot.
●If the optimum exposure cannot be obtained when you press the
shutter button halfway, the shutter speed and aperture value are
displayed in orange. In this case, try adjusting the ISO speed
(=
80) or activating the ash (if subjects are dark, =
95),
which may enable optimum exposure.
●Movies can be recorded in [ ] mode as well, by pressing the
movie button. However, some menu (=
29) and MENU
(=
30) settings may be automatically adjusted for movie
recording.
P Mode
More discerning shots, in your preferred shooting style
●Instructions in this chapter apply to the camera with the mode
dial set to [ ] mode.
●[]: Program AE; AE: Auto Exposure
●Before using a function introduced in this chapter in modes
other than [ ], make sure the function is available in that mode
(=
200).
78
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Locking Image Brightness / Exposure (AE
Lock)
Still Images Movies
Before shooting, you can lock the exposure, or you can specify focus and
exposure separately.
1 Lock the exposure.
zAim the camera at the subject to shoot
with the exposure locked. With the
shutter button pressed halfway, press the
[ ] button.
z[] is displayed, and the exposure is
locked.
zTo unlock the exposure, hold the shutter
button halfway down and press the [ ]
button again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
2 Compose the shot and shoot.
●AE: Auto Exposure
●After the exposure is locked, you can adjust the combination
of shutter speed and aperture value by turning the [ ] dial
(Program Shift).
●You can also lock or unlock the exposure by touching [ ] in
step 1.
Image Brightness (Exposure)
Adjusting Image Brightness (Exposure
Compensation)
Still Images Movies
The standard exposure set by the camera can be adjusted in 1/3-stop
increments, in a range of -3 to +3.
zAs you watch the screen, turn the
exposure compensation dial to adjust
brightness.
Deactivating Expo. Simulation
Images are displayed on the screen at a brightness similar to the image
that will be shot. Therefore, the screen brightness changes accordingly
even when exposure compensation is in use. By not using this function,
you can display images with brightness suitable for shooting regardless of
changes in exposure compensation.
zPress the [ ] button, and
then choose the [ 1] tab ► [Expo.
simulation] ► [Disable] (=
30).
79
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Linking the Spot AE Point Frame to the AF Frame
Still Images Movies
1 Set the metering method to [ ].
zFollow the steps in “Changing the
Metering Method” (=
79) to choose
[ ].
2 Congure the setting.
zPress the [ ] button, choose [Spot
AE Point] on the [ 6] tab, and then
choose [AF Point] (=
30).
zThe Spot AE Point frame will now be
linked to the movement of the AF frame
(=
90).
●Not available when [AF method] is set to [ +Tracking] (=
91).
Changing the Metering Method
Still Images Movies
Adjust the metering method (how brightness is measured) to suit shooting
conditions as follows.
zPress the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(=
29).
zThe option you congured is now
displayed.
Evaluative
metering
For typical shooting conditions, including backlit
shots. Automatically adjusts exposure to match the
shooting conditions.
Spot
metering
Metering restricted to within the [ ] (Spot AE
Point frame). You can also link the Spot AE Point
frame to the AF frame (=
79).
Center-
weighted
average
Determines the average brightness of light across
the entire image area, calculated by treating
brightness in the central area as more important.
80
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Adjusting ISO Auto Settings
Still Images Movies
When the camera is set to [AUTO], maximum ISO speed can be specied
in a range of [400] – [12800], and sensitivity can be specied in a range of
three levels.
1 Access the setting screen.
zPress the [ ] button, choose [ISO
speed] on the [ 5] tab, and then press
the [ ] button (=
30).
zChoose [ISO Auto Settings] and press the
[] button.
2 Congure the setting.
zChoose a menu item to congure, and
then choose the desired option (=
30).
Changing the Noise Reduction Level (High ISO
Speed NR)
You can choose from 3 levels of noise reduction: [Low], [Standard], [High].
This function is especially effective when shooting at high ISO speeds.
zPress the [ ] button, choose [High
ISO speed NR] on the [ 6] tab, and
then choose the desired option (=
30).
Changing the ISO Speed
Still Images Movies
Set the ISO speed to [AUTO] for automatic adjustment to suit the shooting
mode and conditions. Otherwise, set a higher ISO speed for higher
sensitivity, or a lower value for lower sensitivity.
zPress the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(=
29).
zThe option you congured is now
displayed.
●To view the automatically determined ISO speed when you have
set the ISO speed to [AUTO], press the shutter button halfway.
●Although choosing a lower ISO speed may reduce image
graininess, there may be a greater risk of subject and camera
shake in some shooting conditions.
●The faster shutter speed used at higher ISO speeds reduces
subject and camera shake and increases the ash range.
However, shots may look grainy.
●You can also set the ISO speed by accessing MENU (=
30) ►
[5] tab ► [ISO speed] ► [ISO Speed].
81
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Adjusting Auto ND Filter Settings
For optimal brightness in the scenes you shoot, Auto ND lter reduces
light intensity to 1/8 the actual level, by an amount equivalent to three
stops. Choosing [ ] enables you to reduce the shutter speed and
aperture value.
zPress the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(=
29).
zThe option you congured is now
displayed.
●If you chose [ ], mount the camera on a tripod or take other
measures to keep it still and prevent the camera from shaking.
Additionally, you should set [IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod
or other means to secure the camera (=
52).
●ND: Neutral Density
Auto Correction of Brightness and Contrast
(Auto Lighting Optimizer)
Still Images Movies
Correct brightness and contrast automatically to avoid images that are too
dark or lack contrast.
zPress the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(=
29).
Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB Shooting)
Still Images Movies
Three consecutive images are captured at different exposure levels
(standard exposure, underexposure, and then overexposure) each
time you shoot. You can adjust the amount of underexposure and
overexposure (relative to standard exposure) from –2 to +2 stops in 1/3-
stop increments.
1 Choose [ ].
zPress the [ ] button, choose
[Bracketing] on the [ 5] tab, and then
choose [ ] (=
30).
2 Congure the setting.
zPress the [ ] button, and then adjust the
setting by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or
turning the [ ] dial.
●AEB shooting is only available in [ ] mode (=
95).
●Continuous shooting (=
44) is not available in this mode.
●If exposure compensation is already in use (=
78), the value
specied for that function is treated as the standard exposure
level for this function.
●You can also access the setting screen of step 2 by pressing
the [ ] button when the exposure compensation screen
(=
78) is displayed.
●Three shots are taken, regardless of any quantity specied in [ ]
(=
43).
82
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Image Colors
Capturing Natural Colors (White Balance)
Still Images Movies
By adjusting white balance (WB), you can make image colors look more
natural for the scene you are shooting.
zPress the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(=
29).
zThe option you congured is now
displayed.
Auto Automatically sets the optimal white balance
for the shooting conditions.
Daylight For shooting outdoors in fair weather.
Shade For shooting in the shade.
Cloudy For shooting in cloudy weather or at twilight.
Tungsten light For shooting under ordinary incandescent
lighting.
White uorescent
light For shooting under white uorescent lighting.
Flash For shooting with the ash.
Underwater For shooting underwater (=
57).
Custom For manually setting a custom white balance
(=
83).
Color temp. For manually setting white balance color
temperature (=
84).
●This feature may increase noise under some shooting conditions.
●When the effect of the Auto Lighting Optimizer is too strong and
images become too bright, set it to [Low] or [Disable].
●Images may still be bright or the effect of exposure compensation
may be weak under a setting other than [Disable] if you use a
darker setting for exposure compensation or ash exposure
compensation. For shots at your specied brightness, set this
feature to [Disable].
●You can also congure this setting by choosing MENU (=
30)
► [ 5] tab ► [Auto Lighting Optimizer].
Shooting Bright Subjects (Highlight Tone
Priority)
Still Images Movies
Improve gradation in bright image areas to avoid loss of detail in subject
highlights.
zPress the [ ] button, choose
[Highlight tone priority] on the [ 5] tab,
and then choose [D+] (=
30).
●With [D+], ISO speeds of 250 or lower are not available. The Auto
Lighting Optimizer is also disabled, in this case.
83
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
●Shots in step 1 that are too bright or dark may prevent you from
setting the white balance correctly.
●A message is displayed if you specify an image in step 3 that is
not suitable for loading white data. Choose [Cancel] to choose a
different image. Choose [OK] to use that image for loading white
data, but note that it may not produce a suitable white balance.
●If [Unselectable image.] is displayed in step 3, choose [OK] to
clear the message and specify another image.
●If [Set WB to “ ”] is displayed in step 3, press the [ ] button to
return to the menu screen, and then choose [ ].
●Instead of a white object, a gray chart or 18 % gray reector
(commercially available) can produce a more accurate white
balance.
●The current white balance and related settings are disregarded
when you shoot in step 1.
Manually Correcting White Balance
Still Images Movies
You can correct white balance. This adjustment can match the effect of
using a commercially available color temperature conversion lter or color-
compensating lter.
1 Congure the setting.
zFollow the steps in “Capturing Natural
Colors (White Balance)” (=
82) to
choose [ ].
zTurn the [ ] ring to adjust the correction
level for B and A.
Custom White Balance
Still Images Movies
For image colors that look natural under the light in your shot, adjust white
balance to suit the light source where you are shooting. Set the white
balance under the same light source that will illuminate your shot.
1 Shoot a white object.
zAim the camera at a sheet of paper or
other plain white subject, so that white
lls the screen.
zFocus manually and shoot (=
87).
2 Choose [Custom WB].
zChoose [Custom WB] on the [ 6] tab,
and then press the [ ] button.
zThe custom white balance selection
screen will appear.
3 Load the white data.
zSelect your image from step 1, and then
press the [ ] button.
zOn the conrmation screen, press the
[][ ] buttons to choose [OK], press
the [ ] button, and then press the [ ]
button again.
zPress the [ ] button to close the
menu.
4 Choose [ ].
zFollow the steps in “Capturing Natural
Colors (White Balance)” (=
82) to
choose [ ].
84
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Conguring White Balance Color Temperature
Still Images Movies
You can specify a value to congure the white balance color temperature.
zFollow the procedure in “Capturing
Natural Colors (White Balance)”
(=
82) to choose [ ].
zPress the [ ] button, and then adjust the
setting by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or
turning the [ ] dial.
●You can also congure the white balance color temperature by
choosing MENU (=
30) ► [ 6] tab ► [White Balance] ►
[].
●Color temperature can be set in a range of approximately 2,500 to
10,000 K (in 100 K increments).
Customizing Colors (Picture Style)
Still Images Movies
You can choose your preferred colors as a Picture Style to suit the picture
representation and subjects. Eight Picture Styles are available, and each
can be further customized.
zPress the [ ] button, choose [ ] in
the menu, and choose the desired option
(=
29).
2 Congure advanced settings.
zTo congure more advanced settings,
press the [ ] button and adjust the
correction level by turning the [ ] ring
or [ ] dial or pressing the [ ][ ][ ][ ]
buttons.
zTo reset the correction level, press the
[] button.
zPress the [ ] button to complete the
setting.
zOnce the setting is complete, [ ] is
displayed.
●Any correction level you set is retained even if you change the
white balance option in step 1.
●B: blue; A: amber; M: magenta; G: green
●You can customize camera operation so that the B and A
adjustment screen is accessed simply by turning the [ ] ring or
the [ ] dial (=
104).
●One level of blue/amber correction is equivalent to about 5
mireds on a color temperature conversion lter. (Mired: Color
temperature unit representing color temperature conversion lter
density)
●You can also congure this setting by choosing MENU (=
30)
► [ 6] tab ► [WB Correction].
●You can also choose the correction level by touching or dragging
the bar in step 1 or the frame in step 2.
85
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Customizing Picture Styles
You can customize the following settings.
Sharpness
Strength
Adjusts edge enhancement level. For
softer (more blurry) images, set a lower
value, and for harder (sharper) images,
set a higher value.
Fineness
Indicates the edge thinness that
sharpness enhancement applies to.
For more enhanced details, set a lower
value.
Threshold
Species how much difference
in contrast between edges and
surrounding areas there should be to
enhance edges. To enhance edges
with smaller contrast difference, set a
lower value. Note that if you set a lower
value, noise may be emphasized.
Contrast
Adjusts contrast. For lower contrast, set
a lower value, and for higher contrast,
set a higher value.
Saturation*1
Adjusts color saturation. For less
intense colors, set a lower value, and
for more intense colors, set a higher
value.
Color tone*1
Adjusts skin tone. For more red tone,
set a lower value, and for more yellow
tone, set a higher value.
Auto
Automatically adjusts colors to suit the shooting
conditions. Makes pictures of blue skies,
greenery, and sunset colors more vivid in
scenes of nature, outdoor, and sunsets.
Standard
Makes pictures more vivid and sharper.
Generally, this setting can be used for most
scenes.
Portrait
Makes pictures slightly sharper, with clear
skin tone. Ideal for close-ups of people. You
can adjust skin tone by changing [Color tone]
(=
85).
Landscape
Makes pictures much sharper with more vivid
blue skies and greenery. Ideal for impressive
landscape shots.
Fine Detail
Used for rendering sharper edges and intricate
textures. Makes pictures slightly more vivid.
Neutral
Used for images to be processed on a
computer. Makes pictures natural-colored with a
subdued appearance.
Faithful
Used for images assumed to be processed
on a computer. Faithfully reproduces the
actual colors of subjects as measured under
daylight with a color temperature of 5200 K.
Makes pictures have a toned-down color with a
subdued appearance.
Monochrome Creates black and white pictures.
User Def.
You can register basic styles, such as [Portrait],
[Landscape], and Picture Style les, and
customize them (=
84).
●Default [Auto] settings are used for [ ], [ ], and [ ]
until you add a Picture Style.
●You can also congure this setting by accessing MENU (=
30)
► [ 6] tab ► [Picture Style].
86
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
●If you set higher [Contrast], [Filter effect] is more emphasized.
Registering Customized Picture Styles
You can customize basic styles, such as [ ] and [ ], and register
them. You can prepare several styles with different sharpness and
contrast settings.
1 Choose a destination Picture Style.
zFollow the procedure in “Customizing
Colors (Picture Style)” (=
84) to
choose [ ], [ ], or [ ].
zPress the [ ] button.
2 Choose a preset Picture Style.
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose a preset Picture Style.
3 Customize the Picture Style.
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
an item to modify, and then adjust the
setting, either by pressing the [ ][ ]
buttons or turning the [ ] dial.
zWhen nished, press the [ ] button.
●
You can register the Picture Style with the camera using the
software CameraWindow (=
182). For registering to the camera,
refer to CameraWindow Help.
●You can also choose a preset Picture Style by touching [ ]
in step 1.
Filter effect*2
Emphasizes white clouds and green
trees in monochrome images.
N: Normal monochrome images with
no lter effect.
Ye: Blue skies look more natural and
white clouds stand out better.
Or: Blue skies look slightly darker.
Glow of sunsets is emphasized.
R: Blue skies look much darker.
Colored leaves look clearly
brighter.
G: Skin tones and lips of people look
muted. Green leaves of trees look
clearly brighter.
Toning effect*2
Available monochrome colors:
[N:None], [S:Sepia], [B:Blue],
[P:Purple], or [G:Green].
*1 Not available with [ ].
*2 Only available with [ ].
●[Fineness] and [Threshold] of [Sharpness] are not applied to
movies.
1 Access the setting screen.
zFollow the procedure in “Customizing
Colors (Picture Style)” (=
84) to
choose the required Picture Style.
zPress the [ ] button.
2 Congure the setting.
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons to congure the
level of effect, and then choose an option,
either by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or
turning the [ ] dial.
zTo reset the changes, press the [ ]
button.
zWhen nished, press the [ ] button.
87
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Shooting in Manual Focus Mode
Still Images Movies
When focusing is not possible in AF mode, use manual focus. You can
specify the general focal position and then press the shutter button
halfway to have the camera determine the optimal focal position near the
position you specied. For details on the range of focus, see “Shooting
Range” (=
219).
1 Choose [ ].
zPress the [ ] button, choose [ ] (either
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial), and then press the [ ] button.
z[] and the MF indicator are displayed.
2 Specify the general focal position.
zReferring to the on-screen MF indicator
(1, which shows the distance and focal
position) and the magnied display, turn
the [ ] dial to specify the general focal
position, and then press the [ ] button.
zYou can adjust the magnication by
pressing the [ ] button during magnied
display.
zYou can move the focusing frame by
dragging on the magnied display screen.
3 Fine-tune the focus.
zPress the shutter button halfway or touch
[] to ne-tune the focal position (Safety
MF).
zTo cancel manual focus, choose [ ] in
step 1.
(
1
)
Shooting Range and Focusing
Shooting Close-Ups (Macro)
Still Images Movies
To restrict the focus to subjects at close range, set the camera to [ ]. For
details on the range of focus, see “Shooting Range” (=
219).
zPress the [ ] button, choose [ ] (either
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial), and then press the [ ] button.
zOnce the setting is complete, [ ] is
displayed.
●If the ash res, vignetting may occur.
●To prevent camera shake, try mounting the camera on a tripod
and shooting with the camera set to [ ] (=
43).
●You can also congure this setting by pressing the [ ] button,
touching [ ], and then touching it again.
88
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Easily Identifying the Focus Area (MF Peaking)
Still Images Movies
Edges of subjects in focus are displayed in color to make manual focusing
easier. You can adjust the colors and the sensitivity (level) of edge
detection as needed.
1 Access the setting screen.
zPress the [ ] button, choose [MF
Peaking Settings] on the [ 4] tab,
choose [Peaking], and then choose [On]
(=
30).
2 Congure the setting.
zChoose a menu item to congure, and
then choose the desired option (=
30).
●Colors displayed for MF peaking are not recorded in your shots.
Focus Bracketing (Focus-BKT Mode)
Still Images Movies
Three consecutive images are captured each time you shoot, with the
rst one at the focal distance you set manually and the others at farther
and nearer focal positions determined by presets. The distance from your
specied focus can be set in three levels.
1 Choose [ ].
zPress the [ ] button, choose
[Bracketing] on the [ 5] tab, and then
choose [ ] (=
30).
●When you focus manually, the AF method (=
89) is [1-point
AF] and AF frame size (=
90) is [Normal], and these settings
cannot be changed.
●Focusing is possible when using the digital zoom (=
41) or
digital tele-converter (=
89), or when using a TV as a display
(=
179), but the magnied display will not appear.
●To focus more accurately, try attaching the camera to a tripod to
stabilize it.
●You can enlarge or hide the magnied display area by adjusting
MENU (=
30) ► [ 4] tab ► [MF-Point Zoom] settings.
●To deactivate automatic focus ne-tuning when the shutter button
is pressed halfway, choose MENU (=
30) ► [ 4] tab ►
[Safety MF] ► [Off].
●You can lock the focus during movie recording by touching [ ].
[] is then displayed.
89
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Digital Tele-Converter
Still Images Movies
The focal length of the lens can be increased by approximately 1.6x or
2.0x. This can reduce camera shake because the shutter speed is faster
than it would be if you zoomed (including using digital zoom) in to the
same zoom factor.
zPress the [ ] button, choose
[Digital Zoom] on the [ 3] tab, and then
choose the desired option (=
30).
zThe view is enlarged and the zoom factor
is displayed on the screen.
●The shutter speed may be equivalent when you move the zoom
lever all the way toward [ ] for maximum telephoto, and when
you zoom in to enlarge the subject to the same size following step
2 in “Zooming In Closer on Subjects (Digital Zoom)” (=
41).
Choosing the AF Method
Still Images Movies
Change the auto focus (AF) mode to suit shooting conditions.
zPress the [ ] button, choose [ ] in
the menu, and choose the desired option
(=
30).
●You can also congure this setting by accessing MENU (=
30)
► [ 3] tab ► [AF method].
2 Congure the setting.
zPress the [ ] button, and then adjust the
setting by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or
turning the [ ] dial.
●Focus bracketing is only available in [ ] mode (=
95).
●Continuous shooting (=
44) is not available in this mode.
●You can also access the setting screen in step 2 by pressing the
[] button in step 2 of “Shooting in Manual Focus Mode”
(=
87).
●Three shots are taken, regardless of any quantity specied in [ ]
(=
43).
●You can also congure this setting by touching or dragging the
bar on the screen in step 2 to specify a value and then touching
[].
90
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Moving and Resizing AF Frames (1-point AF)
Still Images Movies
When you want to change the position or size of the AF frame, set the AF
method to [1-point AF].
1 Move the AF frame.
zTouch the screen. An AF frame is
displayed in orange where you touched
(Touch AF).
zTurn the [ ] dial to move the AF frame,
and press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to
ne-tune the position.
zTo return the AF frame to the original
position in the center, press the [ ]
button.
2 Resize the AF frame.
zTo reduce the AF frame size, turn the
[ ] ring. Turn it again to restore it to the
original size.
3 Finish the setup process.
zPress the [ ] button.
●AF frames are displayed at normal size when you use the digital
zoom (=
41) or digital tele-converter (=
89), and in manual
focus mode (=
87).
●You can also link the Spot AE Point frame to the AF frame
(=
79).
●You can also congure the AF frame size by pressing the
[] button and choosing [AF Frame Size] on the [ 3] tab
(=
30).
1-point AF
Still Images Movies
The camera focuses using a single AF frame. Effective for reliable
focusing. You can also move the frame by touching the screen (=
93).
●A yellow AF frame is displayed with [ ] if the camera cannot
focus when you press the shutter button halfway.
●To compose shots so that subjects are positioned at the edge or
in a corner, rst aim the camera to capture the subject in an AF
frame, and then hold the shutter button halfway down. As you
continue to hold the shutter button halfway, recompose the shot
as desired, and then press the shutter button all the way down
(Focus Lock).
91
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Shooting with Servo AF
Still Images Movies
This mode helps avoid missing shots of subjects in motion, because the
camera continues to focus on the subject and adjust the exposure as long
as you press the shutter button halfway.
1 Congure the setting.
zPress the [ ] button, choose [ONE
SHOT] in the menu, and then choose
[SERVO] (=
30).
2 Focus.
zThe focus and exposure are maintained
where the blue AF frame is displayed
while you are pressing the shutter button
halfway.
●Focusing may not be possible in some shooting conditions.
●In low-light conditions, Servo AF may not be activated (AF frames
may not turn blue) when you press the shutter button halfway.
In this case, the focus and exposure are set according to the
specied AF method.
●Continuous shooting (=
44) is slower in Servo AF mode.
●If optimum exposure cannot be obtained, the shutter speed and
aperture value are displayed in orange. Release the shutter
button, and then press it halfway again.
●AF lock shooting (=
94) is not available.
●Not available when using the self-timer (=
42).
●To have the camera keep adjusting the focus during continuous
shooting (=
44), specify Servo AF with [AF method] set to
[1-point AF].
●You can also congure this setting by accessing MENU
(=
30) ► [ 3] tab ► [AF operation].
+Tracking
Still Images Movies
●Detects people’s faces, and then sets the focus, exposure (evaluative
metering only), and white balance ([ ] only).
●After you aim the camera at the subject, a white frame is displayed
around the person’s face determined by the camera to be the main
subject, and up to two gray frames are displayed around other
detected faces.
●When the camera detects movement, frames will follow moving
subjects, within a certain range.
●After you press the shutter button halfway, up to nine green frames are
displayed around faces in focus.
●When no faces are detected, or when only gray frames are
displayed (without a white frame), pressing the shutter button
halfway will display green frames in the areas in focus. Note that
the maximum number of frames depends on the aspect ratio
(=
49) setting.
●If no faces are detected in Servo AF (=
91) mode, the AF
frame is displayed in the center of the screen when you press the
shutter button halfway.
●Examples of faces that cannot be detected:
- Subjects that are distant or extremely close
- Subjects that are dark or light
- Faces in prole, at an angle, or partly hidden
●The camera may misinterpret non-human subjects as faces.
●No AF frames are displayed if the camera cannot focus when you
press the shutter button halfway.
92
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Fine-Tuning the Focus
Still Images Movies
You can ne-tune after auto focus using the control ring.
1 Congure the setting.
zPress the [ ] button, choose
[AF+MF] on the [ 4] tab, and then
choose [On] (=
30).
2 Focus.
zPress the shutter button halfway to focus
on the subject, and continue holding the
button halfway down.
3 Fine-tune the focus.
zReferring to the on-screen MF indicator
(which shows the distance and focal
position) that is displayed by turning the
[] ring and the magnied display, turn
the [ ] ring to adjust the focus.
zTo change the zoom factor of the
magnied display, press the [ ] button.
zTo cancel focusing, release the shutter
button.
4 Shoot.
zPress the shutter button all the way down
to shoot.
●Cannot be used with Servo AF (=
91).
Changing the Focus Setting
Still Images Movies
You can change default camera operation of constantly focusing on
subjects it is aimed at, even when the shutter button is not pressed.
Instead, you can limit camera focusing to the moment you press the
shutter button halfway.
zPress the [ ] button, choose
[Continuous AF] on the [ 3] tab, and
then choose [Off] (=
30).
On
Helps avoid missing sudden photo opportunities, because
the camera constantly focuses on subjects until you press
the shutter button halfway.
Off Conserves battery power, because the camera does not
focus constantly.
93
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
5 Shoot.
zPress the shutter button halfway. After the
camera focuses, [ ] changes to [ ].
zPress the shutter button all the way down
to shoot.
●When [Face ID] is set to [On], only the name of the registered
person chosen as the main subject is displayed, even if other
registered people have been detected. However, their names will
be recorded in the still images (=
45).
Choosing Subjects to Focus On (Touch AF)
Still Images Movies
You can shoot after choosing a person’s face or another subject to focus
on.
1 Set the AF method to [ +Tracking]
(=
89).
2 Choose a person’s face or another
subject to focus on.
zTouch the subject or person on the
screen.
zWhen the subject is detected, the camera
beeps and [ ] is displayed. Focus is
maintained even if the subject moves.
zTo cancel Touch AF, touch [ ].
Choosing a Person to Focus On (Face Select)
Still Images Movies
You can shoot after choosing a specic person’s face to focus on.
1 Set the AF method to [ +Tracking]
(=
89).
2 Assign [ ] to the [ ] button or the
movie button (=
106).
3 Enter Face Select mode.
zAim the camera at the person’s face and
press the [ ] button or the movie button.
zAfter [Face Select : On] is displayed, a
face frame [ ] is displayed around the
face detected as the main subject.
zEven if the subject moves, the face frame
[] follows the subject within a certain
range.
zIf a face is not detected, [ ] is not
displayed.
4 Choose the face to focus on.
zTo switch the face frame [ ] to another
detected face, press the [ ] button or
the movie button.
zOnce you cycle through all detected
faces, [Face Select : Off] is displayed,
followed by the selected AF method
screen.
94
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Shooting with the AF Lock
Still Images Movies
The focus can be locked. After you lock the focus, the focal position will
not change even when you release your nger from the shutter button.
1 Lock the focus.
zWith the shutter button pressed halfway,
press the [ ] button.
zThe focus is now locked, and [ ] and
the MF indicator are displayed.
z
To unlock the focus, hold the shutter
button halfway down and press the [ ]
button again.
2 Compose the shot and shoot.
●Cannot be used with Touch Shutter (=
44).
●When [AF method] is set to [1-point AF], you can lock the focus
by touching the screen during movie recording. To unlock the
focus, touch [ ].
3 Shoot.
zPress the shutter button halfway. After
the camera focuses, [ ] changes to a
green [ ].
zPress the shutter button all the way down
to shoot.
●
If you prefer the camera not to shoot when you touch the screen,
make sure [Touch Shutter] mode is deactivated. Press the
[] button, choose [Touch Shutter] on the [ 2] tab, and
then choose [Disable] (
=
30).
●Tracking may not be possible when subjects are too small or
move too rapidly, or when there is inadequate contrast between
subjects and the background.
●Even if you are shooting in [ ] mode (=
87), the camera will
revert to [ ] mode if you touch the screen to specify where to
focus.
●If [Face ID] is set to [On], names will not be displayed when
registered people are detected, but the names will be recorded in
the still images (=
45). However, a name will be displayed if
the subject chosen to focus on is the same as a person detected
with Face ID.
95
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Auto
Fires automatically in low-light conditions.
On
Fires for each shot.
Slow Synchro
Fires to illuminate the main subject (such as people) while shooting at a
slower shutter speed to illuminate backgrounds out of ash range.
●In [ ] mode, mount the camera on a tripod or take other
measures to keep it still and prevent camera shake. Additionally,
you should set [IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod or other
means to secure the camera (=
52).
●In [ ] mode, even after the ash res, ensure that the main
subject does not move until the shutter sound is nished playing.
Off
For shooting without the ash.
●A blinking [ ] icon may be displayed when you press the shutter
button halfway in camera-shake inducing, low-light conditions. In
this case, mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures
to keep it still.
Flash
Changing the Flash Mode
Still Images Movies
You can change the ash mode to match the shooting scene. For details
on the ash range, see “Camera” (=
217).
1 Raise the ash.
zMove the [ ] switch.
2 Congure the setting.
zPress the [ ] button, choose a ash
mode (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or
turn the [ ] dial), and then press the [ ]
button.
zThe option you congured is now
displayed.
●The setting screen cannot be accessed by pressing the [ ] button
when the ash is lowered. Move the [ ] switch to raise the ash,
then congure the setting.
●If the ash res, vignetting may occur.
●You can also congure this setting by pressing the [ ] button,
touching the desired option, and then touching it again.
96
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Shooting with the FE Lock
Still Images Movies
Just as with the AE lock (=
78), you can lock the exposure for ash
shots.
1 Raise the ash and set it to [ ]
(=
95).
2 Lock the ash exposure.
zAim the camera at the subject to shoot
with the exposure locked. With the
shutter button pressed halfway, press the
[ ] button.
zThe ash res, and when [ ] is
displayed, the ash output level is
retained.
zTo unlock FE, press the [ ] button again
with the shutter button pressed halfway.
In this case, [ ] is no longer displayed.
3 Compose the shot and shoot.
●FE: Flash Exposure
●You can also lock or unlock the exposure by touching [ ] on the
setting screen in step 2.
Adjusting the Flash Exposure Compensation
Still Images Movies
Just as with regular exposure compensation (=
78), you can adjust the
ash exposure from –2 to +2 stops, in 1/3-stop increments.
zRaise the ash, press the [ ] button and
immediately turn the [ ] ring to choose
the compensation level, and press the
[ ] button.
zThe correction level you specied is now
displayed.
●When there is a risk of overexposure, the camera automatically
adjusts the shutter speed or aperture value for ash shots to
reduce washed-out highlights and shoot at optimal exposure.
However, you can deactivate automatic adjustment of the shutter
speed and aperture value by accessing MENU (=
30) and
choosing [ 5] tab ► [Flash Settings] ► [Safety FE] ► [Off].
●You can also congure the ash exposure compensation by
accessing MENU (=
30) and choosing [ 5] tab ► [Flash
Settings] ► [Flash Exp. Comp].
●You can also access the [Flash Settings] screen (=
30)
when the ash is up by pressing the [ ] button and immediately
pressing the [ ] button.
●You can also access the [Flash Settings] screen (=
30) by
pressing the [ ] button and touching [ ].
97
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Other Settings
Changing Image Quality
Still Images Movies
Choose from 7 combinations of size (number of pixels) and compression
(image quality). Also specify whether to capture images in RAW format
(=
98). For guidelines on how many of each kind of image can t on a
memory card, see “Number of Shots per Memory Card” (=
220).
zPress the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(=
29).
zThe option you congured is now
displayed.
zTo restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [ ].
●[ ] and [ ] indicate different levels of image quality depending
on the extent of compression. At the same size (number of
pixels), [ ] offers higher image quality. Although [ ] images
have slightly lower image quality, more t on a memory card. Note
that [ ] is image quality of [ ].
●Not available in [ ] mode.
●You can also congure this setting by choosing MENU (=
30)
► [ 1] tab ► [Image quality].
When deciding the number of pixels based on print size, use the following
table as a guide for images with a 3:2 aspect ratio.
A2 (16.5 x 23.4 in.)
A3 (11.7 x 16.5 in.)
A4 (8.3 x 11.7 in.)
3.5 x 5 in., 5 x 7 in., Postcard
Changing the Flash Timing
Still Images Movies
Change the timing of the ash and shutter release as follows.
1 Access the setting screen.
zPress the [ ] button, choose [Flash
Settings] on the [ 5] tab, and then press
the [ ] button (=
30).
2 Congure the setting.
zChoose [Shutter Sync.], and then choose
the desired option (=
30).
1st-curtain The ash res immediately after the shutter opens.
2nd-curtain The ash res immediately before the shutter closes.
98
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
●For details on the relationship between the number of recording
pixels and the number of shots that will t on a card, see “Number
of Shots per Memory Card” (=
220).
●The le extension for JPEG images is .JPG, and the extension for
RAW images is .CR2.
Using the Menu
zPress the [ ] button, choose
[Image quality] on the [ 1] tab, and then
press the [ ] button (=
30).
zTo capture in RAW format at the same
time, turn the [ ] ring and choose
[ ] under [RAW]. Note that only JPEG
images are captured when [−] is selected.
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [JPEG], and then choose
the image size and quality. Note that only
RAW images are captured when [−] is
selected.
zWhen nished, press the [ ] button to
return to the menu screen.
●[RAW] and [JPEG] cannot both be set to [−].
Capturing in RAW Format
The camera can capture images in JPEG and RAW format.
JPEG Images
Processed in the camera for optimal image quality
and compressed to reduce le size. However, the
compression process is irreversible, and images
cannot be restored to their original, unprocessed
state. Image processing may also cause some loss
of image quality.
RAW Images
“Raw” (unprocessed) data, recorded with essentially
no loss of image quality from the camera’s image
processing. The data cannot be used in this state
for viewing on a computer or printing. You must rst
process images on the camera (=
132) or use the
software (Digital Photo Professional, =
182) to
convert images to JPEG or TIFF les. Images can be
adjusted with minimal loss of image quality.
zPress the [ ] button, and then choose
[ ] in the menu (=
29).
zTo capture in RAW format only, choose
the [ ] option.
zTo capture images in both JPEG and
RAW format simultaneously, choose the
JPEG image quality, and then press the
[] button. A [ ] mark is displayed next
to [RAW]. To undo this setting, follow the
same steps and remove the [ ] mark
next to [RAW].
●When transferring RAW images (or RAW and JPEG images
recorded together) to a computer, always use the dedicated
software (=
182).
●Digital zoom (=
41) is not available when capturing images in
RAW format.
99
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Changing the IS Mode Settings
Still Images Movies
You can keep image stabilization off until the moment you shoot.
zFollow the steps in “Deactivating Image
Stabilization” (=
52) to choose [Shoot
Only].
100
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Specic Shutter Speeds ([Tv] Mode)
Still Images Movies
Set your preferred shutter speed before shooting as follows. The camera
automatically adjusts the aperture value to suit your shutter speed.
For details on available shutter speeds, see “Camera” (=
217).
1 Enter [ ] mode.
zSet the mode dial to [ ].
2 Set the shutter speed.
zTurn the [ ] ring to set the shutter speed.
Shutter Speed (Sec.) Available ISO Speed (=
80)
30 – 1.3 [AUTO], [125] – [3200]
1 – 1/2000 [AUTO], [125] – [12800]
●In conditions requiring slower shutter speeds, there may be a
delay before you can shoot again, as the camera processes
images to reduce noise.
●When shooting at low shutter speeds on a tripod, you should set
[IS Mode] to [Off] (=
52).
●Orange display of the aperture value when you press the shutter
button halfway indicates that the optimum exposure has not been
obtained. Adjust the shutter speed until the aperture value is
displayed in white, or use safety shift (=
101).
●[]: Time value
●You can customize camera operation so that turning the [ ] dial
changes the shutter speed (=
104).
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Take smarter, more sophisticated shots, and
customize the camera for your shooting style
●Instructions in this chapter apply to the camera as set to the
respective mode.
101
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Specic Shutter Speeds and Aperture
Values ([M] Mode)
Still Images Movies
Follow these steps before shooting to set your preferred shutter speed
and aperture value to obtain the desired exposure.
For details on available shutter speeds and aperture values, see “Camera”
(=
217).
1 Enter [ ] mode.
zSet the mode dial to [ ].
2 Congure the setting.
zTurn the [ ] dial to set the shutter speed
(1).
zTurn the [ ] ring to set the aperture value
(2).
zWhen the ISO speed is xed, an
exposure level mark (4) based on
your specied values is shown on the
exposure level indicator for comparison
to the standard exposure level (3). The
exposure level mark is shown as [ ] or
[ ] when the difference from standard
exposure exceeds 3 stops.
zThe ISO speed is determined and screen
brightness changes when you press
the shutter button halfway after setting
the ISO speed to [AUTO]. If standard
exposure cannot be obtained with your
specied shutter speed and aperture
value, the ISO speed is displayed in
orange.
(1) (2)
(3)
(
4
)
Specic Aperture Values ([Av] Mode)
Still Images Movies
Set your preferred aperture value before shooting as follows. The camera
automatically adjusts the shutter speed to suit your aperture value.
For details on available aperture values, see “Camera” (=
217).
1 Enter [ ] mode.
zSet the mode dial to [ ].
2 Set the aperture value.
zTurn the [ ] ring to set the aperture
value.
●Orange display of the shutter speed when you press the shutter
button halfway indicates that the optimum exposure has not been
obtained. Adjust the aperture value until the shutter speed is
displayed in white, or use safety shift (see below).
●[ ]: Aperture value (size of the opening made by the
diaphragm in the lens)
●In [ ] and [ ] modes, press the [ ] button and set
[Safety Shift] on the [ 6] tab to [On] (=
30) to have the
camera automatically adjust the shutter speed and aperture value
when there are exposure problems, so that you can shoot at the
optimum exposure.
However, safety shift is disabled when the ash res.
●You can customize camera operation so that turning the [ ] dial
changes the aperture value (=
104).
102
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Shooting Long Exposures (Bulb)
With bulb exposures, shots are exposed for as long as you hold down the
shutter button.
1 Specify bulb exposure.
zSet the shutter speed to [BULB],
following steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Shutter
Speeds and Aperture Values ([M] Mode)”
(=
101).
2 Shoot.
zShots are exposed for as long as you
hold the shutter button all the way down.
The elapsed exposure time is displayed
during exposure.
●Maximum continuous shooting time with this feature is 4 min.
16 sec.
●Mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it
still and prevent camera shake. In this case, also disable image
stabilization (=
52).
●Remote shooting (=
164) function can be used to avoid camera
shake that may otherwise occur when pressing the shutter button
directly.
●When [Touch Shutter] is set to [Enable], shooting is started by
touching the screen once and stopped by touching it again. Be
careful not to move the camera when touching the screen.
Shutter Speed (Sec.) Available ISO Speed (=
80)
[BULB], 30 – 1.3 [AUTO], [125] – [3200]
1 – 1/2000 [AUTO], [125] – [12800]
●After you set the shutter speed and aperture value, the exposure
level may change if you adjust the zoom or recompose the shot.
●Screen brightness may change depending on your specied
shutter speed and aperture value. However, screen brightness
remains the same when the ash is up and the mode is set to [ ].
●Image brightness may be affected by the Auto Lighting Optimizer
(=
81). To keep the Auto Lighting Optimizer disabled in [ ]
mode, touch [ ] on the Auto Lighting Optimizer setting screen to
add a [ ] mark to [Disable during man expo].
●[ ]: Manual
●Calculation of optimum exposure is based on the specied
metering method (=
79).
●The following operations are available when ISO speed is set to
[AUTO].
- Adjust exposure by turning the exposure compensation dial.
- Touch [ ] to lock the ISO speed. Screen brightness changes
accordingly.
103
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Recording Movies at Specic Shutter
Speeds and Aperture Values
Still Images Movies
Set your preferred shutter speed, exposure, aperture value, and ISO
speed.
For details on available shutter speeds, see “Camera” (=
217). For
details on available aperture values and ISO speeds, see “Aperture”
(=
218) and “Changing the ISO Speed” (=
80).
1 Enter [ ] mode.
zSet the mode dial to [ ].
zPress the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose [ ] (=
29).
2 Congure the settings.
zTurn the [ ] dial to set the shutter speed.
zTurn the [ ] ring to set the aperture
value.
3 Shoot.
zPress the movie button.
zYou can also adjust settings while
recording, as described in step 2.
●Some shutter speeds may cause ickering on the screen when
recording under uorescent or LED lighting, which may be
recorded.
Adjusting the Flash Output
Still Images Movies
Choose from the three ash levels in [ ][ ][ ] modes.
1 Specify the ash mode.
zPress the [ ] button, choose [Flash
Settings] on the [ 5] tab, and then press
the [ ] button (=
30).
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[ ] dial to choose [Flash Mode], choose
[Manual], and then press the [ ] button.
2 Congure the setting.
zRaise the ash, press the [ ] button and
immediately turn the [ ] ring to choose
the ash output level, and then press the
[ ] button.
zOnce the setting is complete, the ash
output level is displayed.
[]: Minimum, [ ]: Medium, [ ]:
Maximum
●You can also set the ash level by accessing MENU (=
30)
and choosing [ 5] tab ► [Flash Settings] ► [Flash Output].
●You can also access the [Flash Settings] screen (=
30)
when the ash is up by pressing the [ ] button and immediately
pressing the [ ] button.
●You can also access the [Flash Settings] screen (=
30) by
pressing the [ ] button and touching [ ].
104
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Customization for Shooting Styles
Changing Control Ring Settings
Still Images Movies
Reassign control ring functions as follows. Using the control ring is an
enjoyable way to control the camera as you would a fully manual camera.
1 Choose a function to assign to the
[ ] ring.
zPress the [ ] button.
zChoose an option, either by pressing the
[] or [ ][ ] buttons or by turning the
[ ] ring or [ ] dial.
zPress the [ ] button to complete the
setting.
2 Congure the assigned function.
zTurn the [ ] ring or the [ ] dial to
congure the assigned function.
●You can also congure this setting by pressing the [ ] button,
touching an option to choose it, and then touching it again.
●With the ISO speed in [AUTO] mode, you can also adjust the
exposure before recording by turning the exposure compensation
dial.
●When the ISO speed is xed, an exposure level mark based on
your specied value is shown on the exposure level indicator for
comparison to the standard exposure level. The exposure level
mark is shown as [ ] or [ ] when the difference from standard
exposure exceeds 3 stops.
●You can check the ISO speed in [AUTO] mode by pressing the
shutter button halfway. If standard exposure cannot be obtained
with your specied shutter speed and aperture value, the ISO
speed is displayed in orange.
●Focus can be adjusted during recording by touching [ ] (to
switch it to [ ]) and then pressing the [ ][ ] buttons.
105
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Assigning Functions to the Control Ring
Still Images Movies
Assign functions to the control ring based on each shooting mode.
1 Choose [ ].
zFollowing step 1 in “Changing Control
Ring Settings” (=
104), choose [ ] and
press the [ ] button.
2 Congure the setting.
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose the shooting mode with
function to assign.
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
ring to choose a function to assign to the
control ring (1).
zFunctions you can assign to the control
dial will be updated automatically.
zPress the [ ] button to return to the
shooting screen.
●On the setting screen, you can also congure the functions
assigned to the control ring by touching the functions and then
[].
●You can also access the setting screen by choosing [ ] and
touching [ ] in step 1 of “Changing Control Ring Settings”
(=
104).
(
1
)
Functions Assignable to the Control Ring
Functions you can assign to the control ring vary depending on shooting
mode. These then determine which functions you can assign to the
control dial.
Item Shooting Mode
Av Tv Step Zoom
– – –
ISO ISO ISO
Av Tv –
Focus manually (=
87)
Correct white balance (=
83)
Perform step zoom (=
41)
Perform seamless zoom (=
42)
Congure the effect of the Auto Lighting Optimizer
(=
81)
Adjust the aspect ratio (=
49)
–Assign functions as desired (=
105)
●ISO: ISO speed (=
80); MF: manual focus (=
87); Tv: shutter
speed (=
100); Av: aperture value (=
101).
●When you assign [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ] or [ ] to the [ ] ring, the
functions you can assign to the [ ] dial are the same as for [ ].
●Icons labeled with [ ] indicate that the function is not available in
the current shooting mode or under current function conditions.
●When using [ ], [ ], or [ ], step zoom or seamless
zoom can be assigned with the [ ] ring (=
41).
●When in [ ] or [ ] mode, aperture value or shutter speed can
be assigned.
106
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Customizing the Information Displayed
zFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Customizing
Display Information” (=
106) to choose
[Custom display 1] or [Custom display 2],
and then press the [ ] button.
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose information to display, and
then press the [ ] button to add a [ ]
mark.
zTo see an example of display, press the
[] button to return to the [Screen
info/ toggle settings] screen.
●For a smaller grid pattern, access [ 1] tab ► [Shooting
information display] ► [Grid display].
Assigning Functions to Buttons
Still Images Movies
You can quickly and easily activate functions that you assign to the movie
button or the [ ] button.
1 Access the setting screen.
zPress the [ ] button, choose [Set
button] or [Set button] on the
[ 2] tab, and then press the [ ] button
(=
30).
2 Congure the setting.
zPress the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose a function to
assign, and then press the [ ] button.
Customizing Display Information
Customize what screen is displayed when you press the [ ] button on the
shooting screen. You can also customize what information is displayed.
1 Access the setting screen.
zOn the [ 1] tab, choose [Screen info/
toggle settings] in [Shooting information
display], and then press the [ ] button
(=
30).
2 Congure the setting.
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose any screen you prefer not
to display, and then press the [ ] button
to remove the [ ] mark. Pressing the
[ ] button again will add the [ ] mark,
which indicates that it is selected for
display.
zTo return to the menu screen, press the
[] button.
●An example of display with the options selected in step 2 is shown
at left for reference.
●At least one option must be selected.
107
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Customizing the Quick Set Menu
Still Images Movies
The display of Quick Set menu items can be customized.
Choosing Items to Include in the Menu
1 Access the setting screen.
zPress the [ ] button, choose [Quick
setting menu layout] on the [ 2] tab,
and then press the [ ] button (=
30).
2 Choose icons to include in the
menu.
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
ring or the [ ] dial to choose an icon,
and then press the [ ] button to label
icons you want to display in the Quick Set
menu with [ ].
zSelected items (labeled with a [ ]) will
be included in display.
zItems without a [ ] can be congured on
the [ ] tab of the menu screen.
3 Complete the setting.
zPress the [ ] button, choose [OK]
(either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[ ] ring or the [ ] dial), and then press
the [ ] button.
●Up to 11 items can be displayed in the menu.
●The screen in step 2 can also be accessed by holding down the
[] button when the Quick Set menu is displayed.
3 Use the assigned function as
needed.
zTo activate an assigned function, press
the button you assigned it to.
●To restore default settings, choose [ ] in [Set button] and
[] in [Set button].
●Icons labeled with [ ] indicate that the function is not available in
the current shooting mode or under current function conditions.
●With [ ], you can move and resize the AF frame by pressing
the assigned button in the [1-point AF] AF frame mode (=
90,
=
90).
●With [ ], each press of the button that it is assigned to adjusts
and locks the focus, and [ ] is displayed on the screen.
●With [ ], pressing the button that it is assigned to deactivates
screen display. To restore the display, do any of the following.
- Press any button other than the power button
- Hold the camera in another orientation
- Open or close the screen
- Raise or lower the ash
●You can still record movies in [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], or [ ] mode
even if you assign a function to the movie button.
●You can also congure settings by touching a desired option and
then touching it again or touching [ ].
108
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Saving Shooting Settings
Still Images Movies
Save commonly used shooting modes and your congured function
settings for reuse. To access saved settings later, simply turn the mode
dial to [ ]. Even settings that are usually cleared when you switch
shooting modes or turn the camera off (such as self-timer settings) can be
retained this way.
Settings That Can Be Saved
●Shooting modes ([ ], [ ], [ ], and [ ])
●Items set in [ ], [ ], [ ], and [ ] modes (=
78 – =
101)
●Shooting menu settings
●Zoom positions
●Manual focus positions (=
87)
●My Menu settings (=
109)
1 Enter a shooting mode with settings
you want to save, and change the
settings as desired.
2 Congure the setting.
zPress the [ ] button, choose [Save
Settings] on the [ 2] tab, and then press
the [ ] button.
3 Save the settings.
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
●You can also choose an icon by touching it on the screen in
step 2.
Rearranging Menu Items
1 Access the setting screen.
zOn the screen in step 2 of “Choosing
Items to Include in the Menu” (=
107),
press the [ ] button.
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
ring or the [ ] dial to choose the icon
to replace, and then press the [ ] button.
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
ring or the [ ] dial to choose the new
position, and then press the [ ] button.
2 Congure the setting.
zPress the [ ] button, choose [OK]
(either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[ ] ring or the [ ] dial), and then press
the [ ] button.
●You can also replace an icon using drag.
109
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
3 Rearrange menu items, as needed.
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Sort], and then press the
[ ] button.
zChoose a menu item to move (either
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial), and then press the [ ] button.
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to change the order, and then press
the [ ] button.
zPress the [ ] button.
●Grayed-out items in step 2 can also be specied, but they may
not be available in some shooting modes.
●To make My Menu immediately accessible by pressing the
[] button in Shooting mode, set [Set default view] to [Yes].
●On the [Select items] screen for saving or clearing items, you can
also touch items to select them.
●On the [Sort] screen, you can also drag items to change the
display order.
●To edit saved settings (except their shooting mode), choose [ ],
change the settings, and then repeat steps 2 – 3. These setting
details are not applied in other shooting modes.
●To clear information you have saved to [ ] and restore default
values, turn the mode dial to [ ] and choose [Reset All]
(=
176).
Saving Commonly Used Shooting Menu Items
(My Menu)
Still Images Movies
You can save up to six commonly used shooting menu items on the [ 1]
tab. By customizing the [ 1] tab, you can access these items quickly
from a single screen.
1 Access the setting screen.
zPress the [ ] button, choose [My
Menu settings] on the [ 1] tab, and then
press the [ ] button (=
30).
2 Congure the setting.
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Select items], and then
press the [ ] button.
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose a menu item to save (max.
six items) and then press the [ ] button
to save it.
z[] is displayed.
zTo cancel saving, press the [ ] button.
[ ] is no longer displayed.
zPress the [ ] button.
110
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Viewing
Still Images Movies
After shooting images or movies, you can view them on the screen as
follows.
1 Enter Playback mode.
zPress the [ ] button.
zYour last shot is displayed.
2 Choose images.
zTo view the previous image, press
the [ ] button or turn the [ ] dial
counterclockwise. To view the next
image, press the [ ] button or turn the
[ ] dial clockwise.
zPress and hold the [ ][ ] buttons to
browse through images quickly.
zTo access this screen (Scroll Display
mode), turn the [ ] dial rapidly. In this
mode, turn the [ ] dial to browse through
images.
zTo return to single-image display, press
the [ ] button.
zTo browse images grouped by shooting
date, press the [ ][ ] buttons in Scroll
Display mode.
zMovies are identied by a [ ] icon.
To play movies, go to step 3.
Playback Mode
Have fun reviewing your shots, and browse or edit
them in many ways
●To prepare the camera for these operations, press the [ ]
button to enter Playback mode.
●It may not be possible to play back or edit images that were
renamed or already edited on a computer, or images from other
cameras.
111
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Touch-Screen Operations
zTo view the next image, drag left across
the screen, and to view the previous
image, drag right.
zTo access Scroll Display mode, quickly
drag left or right repeatedly.
zYou can also browse through images in
Scroll Display mode by dragging left or
right.
zTouching the central image will restore
single-image display.
zTo browse images grouped by shooting
date in Scroll Display mode, quickly drag
up or down.
zTo start movie playback, touch [ ] on the
screen in step 2 of “Viewing” (=
110).
zTo adjust the volume during movie
playback, quickly drag up or down across
the screen.
zTo stop playback, touch the screen. The
screen shown at left is displayed, and the
following operations are available.
zTouch [ ] to display the volume panel,
and then touch [ ][ ] to adjust the
volume. At a volume of 0, [ ] is displayed.
zTo switch frames, touch the scrollbar or
drag left or right.
zTo resume playback, touch [ ].
zTouch [ ] to return to the screen in
step 2 of “Viewing” (=
110).
3 Play movies.
zTo start playback, press the [ ] button to
access the movie control panel, press the
[ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button again.
4 Adjust the volume.
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons to adjust the
volume.
zTo adjust the volume when the volume
indicator (1) is no longer displayed, press
the [ ][ ] buttons.
5 Pause playback.
zTo pause or resume playback, press the
[ ] button.
zAfter the movie is nished, [ ] is
displayed.
●To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mode, press the
shutter button halfway.
●To deactivate Scroll Display, choose MENU (=
30) ► [ 5]
tab ► [Scroll Display] ► [Off].
●To have the most recent shot displayed when you enter Playback
mode, choose MENU (=
30) ► [ 5] tab ► [Resume] ►
[Last shot].
●To change the transition shown between images, access MENU
(=
30) and choose your desired effect on the [ 5] tab ►
[Transition Effect].
(
1
)
112
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Customizing the Shooting Information Displayed
Customize the information shown on each screen. Info Display 4 shows
the white balance information, and Info Display 5 shows the Picture Style
information.
1 Access the setting screen.
zChoose [Playback information display]
on the [ 6] tab, and then press the [ ]
button.
2 Choose information to display.
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
information to display, and then press the
[ ] button to add a [ ] mark.
zTo return to the menu screen, press the
[] button.
●An example of display with the options selected in step 2 is shown
at left for reference.
Overexposure Warning (for Image Highlights)
Still Images Movies
Washed-out highlights in the image ash on the screen in detailed
information display (=
112).
Switching Display Modes
Still Images Movies
Press the [ ] button in Playback mode to switch from “No Information
Display” to “Simple Information Display” to “Detailed Information Display”
to “RGB Histogram/GPS Information Display”.
No Information Display
Simple Information Display
Detailed Information Display
RGB Histogram, GPS Information
Display
●Switching display modes is not possible while the camera is
connected via Wi-Fi to devices other than printers.
113
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
●[---] is shown instead of numerical values for items not available
on your smartphone or items not recorded correctly.
●You can also display an RGB histogram at the top of the Info
Display 2 – 6 screens. Choose Info Display 2 – 5 on the [Playback
information display] setting screen on the [ 6] tab, press the
[] button, press the [ ][ ]buttons to choose [RGB], and then
press the [ ] button. Note that the brightness histogram is now
displayed at the bottom of the Info Display 3 screen.
●UTC: Coordinated Universal Time, essentially the same as
Greenwich Mean Time
●GPS information display is not available for images that lack this
information.
●You can also switch between the RGB histogram (still images
only) and GPS information display by dragging the lower half of
the screen upward or downward in detailed information display.
Histogram
Still Images Movies
zThe graph in detailed information display
(=
112) is a histogram showing the
distribution of brightness in the image.
The horizontal axis represents the degree
of brightness, and the vertical axis, how
much of the image is at each level of
brightness. Viewing the histogram is a
way to check exposure.
zThe histogram can also be accessed
while shooting (=
106, =
197).
RGB Histogram, GPS Information Display
Still Images Movies
zThe RGB histogram shows the
distribution of shades of red, green, and
blue in an image. The horizontal axis
represents R, G, or B brightness, and the
vertical axis, how much of the image is
at that level of brightness. Viewing this
histogram enables you to check image
color characteristics.
zUsing a smartphone connected to the
camera via Wi-Fi, you can geotag images
on the camera, adding information such
as latitude, longitude, and elevation
(=
164). You can review this information
in the GPS information display.
zLatitude, longitude, elevation, and UTC
(shooting date and time) are listed from
top to bottom.
114
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Checking People Detected in Face ID
Still Images Movies
If you switch the camera to simple information display mode (=
112),
the names of up to ve detected people registered in Face ID (=
45)
will be displayed.
zPress the [ ] button several times until
simple information display is activated,
and then press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose an image.
zNames will be displayed on detected
people.
●If you prefer not to have names displayed on images shot using
Face ID, choose MENU (=
30) ► [ 3] tab ► [Face ID Info]
► [Name Display] ► [Off].
Viewing Short Movies Created When Shooting
Still Images (Digest Movies)
Still Images Movies
View digest movies recorded automatically in [ ] mode (=
36) on a
day of still image shooting as follows.
1 Choose an image.
zStill images shot in [ ] mode are
labeled with [ ] icon.
zChoose a still image labeled with [ ]
and press the [ ] button.
2 Play the digest movie.
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ],
and then press the [ ] button.
zThe movie recorded automatically on the
day of still image shooting is played back,
from the beginning.
●After a moment, [ ] will no longer be displayed when you are
using the camera with information display deactivated (=
112).
Viewing by Date
Digest movies can be viewed by date.
zPress the [ ] button, choose [List/
Play Digest Movies] on the [ 2] tab,
and then touch a date (=
30).
115
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Touch-Screen Operations
zPinch in to switch from single-image
display to index display.
zTo view more thumbnails per screen,
pinch in again.
zDrag up or down on the screen to scroll
through displayed images.
zTo view fewer thumbnails per screen,
spread your ngers apart.
zTouch an image to choose it, and touch it
again to view it in single-image display.
Finding Images Matching Specied Conditions
Still Images Movies
Find desired images quickly on a memory card full of images by ltering
image display according to your specied conditions. You can also protect
(=
121) or delete (=
123) these images all at once.
Favorites Displays images tagged as favorites (=
126).
Shot Date Displays the images shot on a specic date.
People Displays images with detected faces.
Still image/
Movie
Displays still images, movies, or movies shot in
[] mode (=
36).
Name Displays images of a registered person (=
45).
Browsing and Filtering Images
Navigating through Images in an Index
Still Images Movies
By displaying multiple images in an index, you can quickly nd the images
you are looking for.
1 Display images in an index.
zMove the zoom lever toward [ ] to
display images in an index. Moving the
lever again will increase the number of
images shown.
zTo display fewer images, move the zoom
lever toward [ ]. Fewer images are
shown each time you move the lever.
2 Choose an image.
zTurn the [ ] dial to scroll through the
images.
zPress the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
an image.
zAn orange frame is displayed around the
selected image.
zPress the [ ] button to view the selected
image in single-image display.
●To deactivate the 3D display effect (shown if you hold down the
[][ ] buttons), choose MENU (=
30) ► [ 5] tab ► [Index
Effect] ► [Off].
116
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
●To hide or view other information, press the [ ] button in step 3.
●Options for viewing the images found (in step 3) include
“Navigating through Images in an Index” (=
115), “Magnifying
Images” (=
119), and “Viewing Slideshows” (=
120). You can
also apply image operations to all images found, by choosing
[Protect All Images in Search] in “Protecting Images” (=
121) or
[Select All Images in Search] in “Erasing Multiple Images at Once”
(=
124), “Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF)” (=
187), or
“Adding Images to a Photobook” (=
190).
●If you edit images and save them as new images (=
128 –
=
135), a message is displayed, and the images that were
found are no longer shown.
●You can also choose conditions by touching the screens in steps
1 and 2.
●After choosing conditions, you can view images matching your
conditions by touching a condition again.
1 Choose the rst condition.
zIn single-image display, press the [ ]
button, choose [ ] in the menu, and
choose a condition.
zWhen [ ] or [ ] is selected, you can
view only images matching this condition
by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or turning
the [ ] dial. To perform an action for all
of these images together, press the [ ]
button and go to step 3.
2 Choose the second condition and
view the ltered images.
zWhen you have selected [ ] or [ ] as
the rst condition, choose the second
by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons, and then
turn the [ ] dial to view only matching
images.
zTo switch to ltered image display, press
the [ ] button and go to step 3.
zWhen you have selected [ ] as the rst
condition, press the [ ] button, and
press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons on the
next screen to choose a person.
3 View the ltered images.
zImages matching your conditions are
displayed in yellow frames. To view only
these images, press the [ ][ ] buttons, or
turn the [ ] dial.
zTo cancel ltered display, press the [ ]
button, choose [ ] in the menu, and
then press the [ ] button again.
●When the camera has found no corresponding images for some
conditions, those conditions will not be available.
117
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Touch-Screen Operations
zYou can also jump to the previous or next
image according to your jump method
chosen in step 1 of “Using the Control
Ring to Jump between Images” (=
117)
by dragging left or right with two ngers.
Viewing Individual Images in a Group
Still Images Movies
Images saved as source data in [ ] mode (=
68) are grouped, and
only the rst image is displayed. However, you can also view the images
individually.
1 Choose a grouped image.
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image labeled with
[ ].
2 Choose [ ].
zPress the [ ] button, and then choose
[ ] in the menu (=
29).
3 View images in the group
individually.
zPressing the [ ][ ] buttons or turning the
[ ] dial will display only images in the
group.
zTo cancel group playback, press the [ ]
button, choose [ ] in the menu, and
press the [ ] button again (=
29).
Using the Control Ring to Jump between
Images
Still Images Movies
Use the control ring to nd and jump between desired images quickly by
ltering image display according to your specied conditions.
Jump to Favorites Displays images tagged as favorites
(=
126).
Jump Shot Date Jumps to the rst image in each group of
images that were shot on the same date.
Single image Jumps by 1 image at a time.
Jump 10 Images Jumps by 10 images at a time.
Jump 100 Images Jumps by 100 images at a time.
1 Choose a condition.
zChoose a condition (or jump method) in
single-image display by turning the [ ]
ring and immediately pressing the [ ][ ]
buttons.
2 View images matching your
specied condition, or jump by the
specied amount.
zTurn the [ ] ring to view only images
matching the condition or jump by the
specied number of images forward or
back.
118
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Editing Face ID Information
If you notice that a name is incorrect during playback, you can change it
or erase it.
However, you cannot add names for people who are not detected by Face
ID (names are not displayed), and for people whose names have been
erased.
Changing Names
1 Access the setting screen.
zPress the [ ] button and choose
[Face ID Info] on the [ 3] tab (=
30).
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Edit ID Info], and then
press the [ ] button.
2 Choose an image.
zFollowing the procedure in “Checking
People Detected in Face ID” (=
114),
choose an image and press the [ ]
button.
zAn orange frame is displayed around the
selected face. When multiple names are
displayed in an image, press the [ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose the
name to change, and then press the [ ]
button.
3 Choose the editing option.
zPress the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [Overwrite], and
then press the [ ] button.
●During group playback (step 3), you can browse through images
quickly “Navigating through Images in an Index” (=
115) and
magnify them “Magnifying Images” (=
119). You can apply your
actions to all images in the group at once by choosing [Protect All
Images in Group] in “Protecting Images” (=
121), [All Images in
Group] in “Erasing Multiple Images at Once” (=
124), [Select All
in Group] in “Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF)” (=
187),
or [Select All in Group] in “Adding Images to a Photobook”
(=
190).
●To ungroup images so that they are displayed only as single
still images, choose MENU (=
30) ► [ 5] tab ► [Group
Images] ► [Off] (=
30). However, grouped images cannot be
ungrouped during individual playback.
119
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Image Viewing Options
Magnifying Images
Still Images Movies
1 Magnify an image.
zMoving the zoom lever toward [ ] will
zoom in and magnify the image. You
can magnify images up to about 10x by
continuing to hold the zoom lever.
zThe approximate position of the displayed
area (1) is shown for reference.
zTo zoom out, move the zoom lever
toward [ ]. You can return to single-
image display by continuing to hold it.
2 Move the display position and
switch images as needed.
zTo move the display position, press the
[ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons.
zTo switch to other images while zoomed,
turn the [ ] dial.
●You can return to single-image display from magnied display by
pressing the [ ] button.
●You can check the focus when [ ] is displayed by pressing
the [ ] button to show the position in focus (Focus Check).
When multiple positions are in focus, press the [ ] button
repeatedly to switch to other positions.
(
1
)
4 Choose the name of the person to
overwrite with.
zFollow step 2 in “Overwriting and Adding
Face Information” (=
48) to choose
the name of the person you want to
overwrite with.
●You can also access the [Edit ID Info] screen by touching an
image on the screen in step 2, touching [ ] to display the
orange frame, and then touching the face to overwrite its name.
●You can also choose editing options by touching them in step 3.
Erasing Names
zOn the screen displayed in step 3 in
“Changing Names” (=
118), choose
[Erase] and press the [ ] button.
zAfter [Erase?] is displayed, press the
[][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [OK], and then press the [ ]
button.
120
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
●To pause or resume slideshows, press the [ ] button.
●You can switch to other images during playback by pressing the
[][ ] buttons or turning the [ ] dial. For fast-forward or fast-
rewind, hold the [ ][ ] buttons down.
●You can congure slideshow repetition, display time per image,
and the transition between images on the screen accessed by
choosing [Set up] and pressing the [ ] button (=
30).
●You can also stop slideshows by touching the screen.
Touch-Screen Operations
zSpread your ngers apart (pinch out) to
zoom in.
zYou can magnify images up to about 10x
by repeating this action.
zTo move the display position, drag across
the screen.
zPinch in to zoom out.
zTouch [ ] to restore single-image
display.
Viewing Slideshows
Still Images Movies
Automatically play back images from a memory card.
zPress the [ ] button, and then
choose [Slideshow] on the [ 1] tab
(=
30).
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Start], and then press the
[ ] button.
zThe slideshow will start after [Loading
image] is displayed for a few seconds.
zPress the [ ] button to stop the
slideshow.
●The camera’s power-saving functions (=
27) are deactivated
during slideshows.
121
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Choosing Images Individually
1 Choose [Select].
zFollowing the procedure in “Using the
Menu” (=
121), choose [Select] and
press the [ ] button.
2 Choose an image.
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button. [ ] is displayed.
zTo cancel selection, press the [ ] button
again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
zRepeat this process to specify other
images.
3 Protect the image.
zPress the [ ] button. A conrmation
message is displayed.
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
●Images will not be protected if you switch to Shooting mode or
turn the camera off before nishing the setup process in step 3.
●You can also select or clear images by touching the screen in
step 2, and you can access the conrmation screen by touching
[].
●You can also protect images by touching [OK] on the screen in
step 3.
Protecting Images
Still Images Movies
Protect important images to prevent accidental erasure (=
123).
zPress the [ ] button, choose [ ] in
the menu, and then choose [ ] (either
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial). [ ] is displayed.
zTo cancel protection, choose [OFF]. [ ]
is no longer displayed.
●Protected images on a memory card will be erased if you format
the card (=
169).
●Protected images cannot be erased using the camera’s erasure
function. To erase them this way, rst cancel protection.
Using the Menu
1 Access the setting screen.
zPress the [ ] button and choose
[Protect] on the [ 1] tab (=
30).
2 Choose a selection method.
zChoose an option as desired (=
30).
zTo return to the menu screen, press the
[] button.
122
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
4 Protect the images.
zPress the [ ] button to choose [Protect],
and then press the [ ] button.
●You can also choose the rst or last image by turning the [ ] dial
when the top screen in steps 2 and 3 is displayed.
●To cancel protection for groups of images, choose [Unlock] in
step 4.
●You can also display the screen for choosing the rst or last
image by touching an image on the top screen in steps 2 or 3.
●You can also protect images by touching [Protect] on the screen
in step 4.
Protecting All Images at Once
1 Choose [Protect All Images].
zFollowing the procedure in “Using the
Menu” (=
121), choose [Protect All
Images] and press the [ ] button.
2 Protect the images.
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
Selecting a Range
1 Choose [Select Range].
zFollowing the procedure in “Using the
Menu” (=
121), choose [Select Range]
and press the [ ] button.
2 Choose a starting image.
zPress the [ ] button.
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button.
3 Choose an ending image.
zPress the [ ] button to choose [Last
image], and then press the [ ] button.
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button.
zImages before the rst image cannot be
selected as the last image.
123
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Erasing Images
Still Images Movies
You can choose and erase unneeded images one by one. Be careful
when erasing images, because they cannot be recovered. However,
protected images (=
121) cannot be erased.
1 Choose an image to erase.
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image.
2 Erase the image.
zPress the [ ] button.
zAfter [Erase?] is displayed, press the
[][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [Erase], and then press the [ ]
button.
zThe current image is now erased.
zTo cancel erasure, press the [ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose
[Cancel], and then press the [ ] button.
●For images captured in both RAW and JPEG format, pressing the
[] button while the image is displayed gives you the option of
choosing [Erase ], [Erase ], or [Erase ].
●You can also erase the current image by touching [Erase] on the
screen in step 2.
●Images can also be erased by using Touch Actions (=
127).
Clearing All Protection at Once
You can clear protection from all images at once.
To clear protection, choose [Unprotect All Images] in step 1 of “Protecting
All Images at Once”, and then complete step 2.
124
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Choosing Images Individually
1 Choose [Select].
zFollowing the procedure in “Choosing
a Selection Method” (=
124), choose
[Select] and press the [ ] button.
2 Choose an image.
zOnce you choose an image following
step 2 in “Choosing Images Individually”
(=
121), [ ] is displayed.
zTo cancel selection, press the [ ] button
again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
zRepeat this process to specify other
images.
3 Erase the images.
zPress the [ ] button. A conrmation
message is displayed.
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
●Choosing an image captured in both RAW and JPEG format will
erase both versions.
Erasing Multiple Images at Once
You can choose multiple images to erase at once. Be careful when
erasing images, because they cannot be recovered. However, protected
images (=
121) cannot be erased.
Choosing a Selection Method
1 Access the setting screen.
zPress the [ ] button, and then
choose [Erase] on the [ 1] tab
(=
30).
2 Choose a selection method.
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose a selection method, and
then press the [ ] button.
zTo return to the menu screen, press the
[] button.
125
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Rotating Images
Still Images Movies
Change the orientation of images and save them as follows.
1 Choose [ ].
zPress the [ ] button, and then choose
[ ] in the menu (=
29).
2 Rotate the image.
zPress the [ ] or [ ] button, depending
on the desired direction. Each time you
press the button, the image is rotated
90°. Press the [ ] button to complete the
setting.
●Rotation is not possible when [Auto Rotate] is set to [Off]
(=
126).
Using the Menu
1 Choose [Rotate].
zPress the [ ] button and choose
[Rotate] on the [ 1] tab (=
30).
Selecting a Range
1 Choose [Select Range].
zFollowing the procedure in “Choosing
a Selection Method” (=
124), choose
[Select Range] and press the [ ] button.
2 Choose images.
zFollow steps 2 – 3 in “Selecting a Range”
(=
122) to specify images.
3 Erase the images.
zPress the [ ] button to choose [Erase],
and then press the [ ] button.
Specifying All Images at Once
1 Choose [Select All Images].
zFollowing the procedure in “Choosing
a Selection Method” (=
124), choose
[Select All Images] and press the [ ]
button.
2 Erase the images.
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
126
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Tagging Images as Favorites
Still Images Movies
You can organize images by tagging them as favorites. By choosing a
category in ltered playback, you can restrict the following operations to
all of those images.
●“Viewing” (=
110), “Viewing Slideshows” (=
120), “Protecting
Images” (=
121), “Erasing Images” (=
123), “Adding Images to
the Print List (DPOF)” (=
187), “Adding Images to a Photobook”
(=
190)
zPress the [ ] button, and then choose
[ ] in the menu (=
29).
zTo untag the image, repeat this process
and choose [OFF], and then press the
[] button.
Using the Menu
1 Choose [Favorites].
zPress the [ ] button and choose
[Favorites] on the [ 1] tab (=
30).
2 Choose an image.
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button. [ ] is displayed.
zTo untag the image, press the [ ] button
again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
zRepeat this process to choose additional
images.
2 Rotate the image.
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image.
zThe image is rotated 90° each time you
press the [ ] button.
zTo return to the menu screen, press the
[] button.
●On the screen in step 2, you can also touch [ ] to rotate
images or touch [ ] to return to the menu screen.
Deactivating Auto Rotation
Follow these steps to deactivate automatic image rotation, which rotates
images based on the current camera orientation.
zPress the [ ] button, choose [Auto
Rotate] on the [ 5] tab, and then
choose [Off] (=
30).
●Images cannot be rotated (=
125) when you set [Auto Rotate]
to [Off]. Additionally, images already rotated will be displayed in
the original orientation.
127
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Convenient Control: Touch Actions
Still Images Movies
You can quickly and easily activate functions that you have assigned to
four touch gestures (Touch Actions), in single-image display.
Using Touch Actions Functions
zDrag across the screen as shown.
zThe function assigned to [ ] is now
activated.
zSimilarly, you can also activate functions
assigned to [ ], [ ], and [ ] by
dragging across the screen.
zCustomize functions assigned to Touch
Actions as desired.
Changing Touch Actions Functions
Simplify your preferred camera operations by reassigning dragging
patterns to them as desired.
1 Access the setting screen.
zPress the [ ] button, and then
choose [Set Touch Actions] on the [ 6]
tab (=
30).
3 Complete the setting.
zPress the [ ] button. A conrmation
message is displayed.
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
●Images will not be tagged as favorites if you switch to Shooting
mode or turn the camera off before nishing the setup process in
step 3.
●Tagging images as favorites makes it easier to add them when
creating albums (=
136).
●You can also select or clear current images by touching the
screen in step 2.
●Images can also be tagged as favorites by using Touch Actions
(=
127).
128
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Editing Still Images
●Image editing (=
128 – =
131) is only available when the
memory card has sufcient free space.
●You can access editing screens for various functions by touching
an image after choosing the function in the menu.
●When [ ] is shown on an editing screen, you can touch
[] instead of pressing the [ ] button, if you prefer.
●When [ ] is shown on an editing screen, you can touch
[] instead of pressing the [ ] button, if you prefer.
Resizing Images
Still Images Movies
Save a copy of images at a lower number of recording pixels.
1 Choose an image size.
zPress the [ ] button, choose [ ] in
the menu, and choose an image size
(=
29).
zPress the [ ] button.
2 Save the new image.
zAfter [Save new image?] is displayed,
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
zThe image is now saved as a new le.
2 Assign a function to a Touch Action.
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose a dragging pattern, and
then press the [ ] button.
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose a function to assign.
Assignable Functions
Slideshow Start a slideshow.
Erase Erase an image.
Protect Protect an image or cancel protection.
Rotate Rotate an image.
Favorites Tag images as favorites, or untag the image.
Next Favorite Switch to displaying the next image tagged as
a favorite.
Previous Favorite Switch to displaying the previous image tagged
as a favorite.
Next Date Switch to displaying the rst image with the
next shooting date.
Previous Date Switch to displaying the rst image with the
previous shooting date.
To Camera
Access the Wi-Fi connection screen.
For Wi-Fi details, see “Wi-Fi Functions”
(=
141).
To Smartphone
To Computer
To Printer
To Web Service
129
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
4 Save as a new image and review.
zFollow step 2 in “Resizing Images”
(=
128).
zPress the [ ] button and follow step
3 in “Resizing Images” (=
128).
Cropping
Still Images Movies
You can specify a portion of an image to save as a separate image le.
1 Access the setting screen.
zPress the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then press the [ ] button
(=
29).
2 Resize, move, and adjust the aspect
ratio of the cropping frame.
zTo resize the frame, move the zoom
lever.
zTo move the frame, press the
[][ ][ ][ ] buttons.
zTo change the frame orientation, turn the
[] dial to choose [ ], and then press
the [ ] button.
zTo change the frame aspect ratio, turn
the [ ] dial to choose [ ]. To switch
between aspect ratios ([ ], [ ],
[ ], and [ ]), press the [ ] button
repeatedly.
3 Review the new image.
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Yes], and then press the
[ ] button.
zThe saved image is now displayed.
●Editing is not possible for images shot at a recording pixel setting
of [ ].
●RAW images cannot be edited.
●Images cannot be resized to a higher number of recording pixels.
●You can also view saved images by touching [Yes] on the screen
in step 3.
Using the Menu
1 Choose [Resize].
zPress the [ ] button and choose
[Resize] on the [ 3] tab (=
30).
2 Choose an image.
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button.
3 Choose an image size.
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose the size, and then press
the [ ] button.
130
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Applying Filter Effects
Apply effects equivalent to shooting in [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], and
[ ] modes to images and save them as separate images.
1 Choose an effect.
zPress the [ ] button, choose [ ] in
the menu, and then choose the effect
(=
29).
zPress the [ ] button.
2 Adjust the effect as needed.
z[ ]: Press the [ ][ ] buttons to adjust
contrast.
z[]: Press the [ ][ ] buttons to adjust
defocusing.
z[] or [ ]: Press the [ ][ ] buttons to
adjust the level of the effect.
z[]: Press the [ ][ ] buttons to adjust
color saturation.
z[]: Press the [ ][ ] buttons to adjust
color tone.
z[]: Move the zoom lever to resize the
frame, and turn the [ ] dial to move it.
3 Save as a new image and review.
zPress the [ ] button.
zFollow steps 2 – 3 in “Resizing Images”
(=
128).
3 Preview the cropped image.
zTurn the [ ] dial to choose [ ].
zTo switch display between the cropped
image and the cropping frame, press the
[] button repeatedly.
4 Save as a new image and review.
zTurn the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
zFollow steps 2 – 3 in “Resizing Images”
(=
128).
●Editing is not possible for images shot at a recording pixel setting
of [ ] or resized to [ ] (=
128).
●RAW images cannot be edited.
●Cropped images cannot be cropped again.
●Cropped images cannot be resized or have Creative lters
applied.
●Cropped images will have a lower number of recording pixels than
uncropped images.
●While previewing the cropped image in step 3, you can resize,
move, and adjust the aspect ratio of the cropping frame.
●Operations in step 2 are also possible by pressing the [ ]
button, choosing [ 3] tab ► [Cropping], pressing the [ ]
button, choosing an image, and pressing the [ ] button again.
●If you crop still images shot using Face ID (=
45), only the
names of the people left in the cropped image will remain.
●You can also move the cropping frame in step 2 by dragging it.
You can also resize frames by pinching in or out (=
120) on the
screen.
●Operations are also possible by touching [ ], [ ], [ ], and
[] on the top of the screen in step 2.
131
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
3 Correct the image.
zPress the [ ] button.
zRed-eye detected by the camera is now
corrected, and frames are displayed
around corrected image areas.
zEnlarge or reduce images as needed.
Follow the steps in “Magnifying Images”
(=
119).
4 Save as a new image and review.
zPress the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [New File], and
then press the [ ] button.
zThe image is now saved as a new le.
zPress the [ ] button and follow step
3 in “Resizing Images” (=
128).
●Some images may not be corrected accurately.
●To overwrite the original image with the corrected image, choose
[Overwrite] in step 4. In this case, the original image will be
erased.
●Protected images cannot be overwritten.
●RAW images cannot be edited this way.
●Red-eye correction can be applied to JPEG images also captured
in RAW format, but the original image cannot be overwritten.
●You can also save images by touching [New File] or [Overwrite]
on the screen in step 4.
●[ ]: To switch the orientation of the frame to vertical, press
the [ ][ ] buttons on the screen in step 2. To move the frame,
press the [ ][ ] buttons again. To return the frame to horizontal
orientation, press the [ ][ ] buttons.
●The same operations are available by pressing the [ ]
button and choosing [ 2] tab ► [Creative lters], choosing an
image, and pressing the [ ] button.
●You can also adjust the effect by touching or dragging the bar on
the bottom of the screen in step 2. For [ ], you can also move
the frame by touching or dragging across the screen.
Correcting Red-Eye
Still Images Movies
Automatically corrects images affected by red-eye. You can save the
corrected image as a separate le.
1 Choose [Red-Eye Correction].
zPress the [ ] button, and then
choose [Red-Eye Correction] on the
[ 3] tab (=
30).
2 Choose an image.
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image.
132
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
5 Save the settings.
zIf you chose [ ], press the [ ][ ][ ][ ]
buttons to choose [ ], press the [ ]
button, press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [OK], and then
press the [ ] button.
zIf you chose [ ], press the [ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose
[OK], and then press the [ ] button.
Brightness
adjustment Adjust brightness.
White Balance Choose the white balance.
Picture Style Choose a Picture Style type.
Auto Lighting
Optimizer Congure the Auto Lighting Optimizer settings.
High ISO speed NR Congure the noise reduction settings.
Image quality Congure the image quality when creating
JPEG images.
●You can also choose an effect for each option by turning the [ ]
dial while an option is selected on the screen in step 3.
●Moving the zoom lever toward [ ] on the screen in step 3 will
zoom in and magnify the image.
●To compare the image with the shot image, press the [ ]
button, and then turn the [ ] dial on the screen in step 3. To
return to the setting screen, press the [ ] button.
●To revert to the settings used for shooting, press the [ ] button
on the screen in step 3.
●For functions with [ ] displayed on the screen in step 4,
you can congure more advanced settings by pressing the [ ]
button.
Processing RAW Images on the Camera
Still Images Movies
You can process RAW images on the camera. Save RAW images as
JPEG images while leaving the originals.
1 Choose a RAW image.
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose a RAW image.
2 Access the setting screen.
zPress the [ ] button to choose [ ] in
the menu, and then choose the desired
option, either by pressing the [ ][ ]
buttons or turning the [ ] dial.
zIf you chose [ ], go to step 5.
3 Congure the processing method.
zIf you chose [ ], press the [ ] button,
press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
an option, and then press the [ ] button.
4 Congure advanced settings.
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose the effect, and then press
the [ ] button to return to the screen in
step 3.
133
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
3 Process the images.
zFollow steps 2 – 5 in “Processing RAW
Images on the Camera” (=
132) to
process images.
Selecting a Range
1 Choose [Select Range].
zFollow the procedure in “Using the Menu”
(=
129) to choose [Select Range], and
then press the [ ] button.
2 Choose images.
zFollow steps 2 – 3 in “Selecting a Range”
(=
122) to choose images.
3 Process the images.
zFollow steps 2 – 5 in “Processing RAW
Images on the Camera” (=
132) to
process images.
●Images processed on the camera and the ones processed using
Digital Photo Professional will not be exactly the same.
●Up to 500 images can be chosen at a time.
●To choose the processing method from the menu, press the
[][ ] buttons to choose the desired option in step 3.
Using the Menu
1 Access the setting screen.
zPress the [ ] button, and then
choose the [ 3] tab ► [RAW img
processing] (=
132).
2 Choose a selection method.
zChoose the desired option (=
30).
zTo return to the menu screen, press the
[] button.
Choosing Images Individually
1 Choose [Select].
zFollowing the procedure in “Using the
Menu” (=
133), choose [Select] and
press the [ ] button.
2 Choose an image.
zOnce you choose an image following
step 2 in “Choosing Images Individually”
(=
121), [ ] is displayed.
zTo deselect the image, press the [ ]
button again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
zRepeat this process to specify other
images.
zPress the [ ] button to go to the
setting screen.
134
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
3 Review the edited movie.
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[ ], and then press the [ ] button. The
edited movie is now played.
zTo edit the movie again, repeat step 2.
zTo cancel editing, press the [ ]
button, choose [OK] (either press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
then press the [ ] button.
4 Save the edited movie.
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ],
and then press the [ ] button.
zPress the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [New File], and
then press the [ ] button.
zChoose [Save w/o Comp.], and then
press the [ ] button.
zThe movie is now saved as a new le.
●To overwrite the original movie with the cut one, choose
[Overwrite] in step 4. In this case, the original movie will be
erased.
●If the memory card lacks sufcient space, only [Overwrite] will be
available.
●Movies may not be saved if the battery pack runs out while saving
is in progress.
●Using a fully charged battery pack is recommended when editing
movies.
●You can also edit movies by touching the movie editing panel or
editing bar.
Editing Movies
Still Images Movies
You can remove unneeded portions from the beginning and end of
movies.
1 Choose [ ].
zFollowing steps 1 – 5 in “Viewing”
(=
110), choose [ ] and press the [ ]
button.
zThe movie editing panel and editing bar
are now displayed.
2 Specify portions to cut.
z(1) is the movie editing panel, and (2) is
the editing bar.
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ]
or [ ].
zTo specify a portion to cut (indicated by
[]), press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to move the orange [ ] or
[ ] icon. Cut the beginning of the movie
(from [ ]) by choosing [ ], and cut the
end of the movie by choosing [ ].
zIf you move [ ] or [ ] to a position other
than a [ ] mark, in [ ] the portion
before the nearest [ ] mark on the left
will be cut, while in [ ] the portion after
the nearest [ ] mark on the right will be
cut.
(1)
(2)
135
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Editing Short Movies
Still Images Movies
Individual chapters (clips) (=
36) recorded in [ ] mode can be
erased, as needed. Erased chapters cannot be recovered. Be sure that
you want to erase the chapters before using this option.
1 Select the clip to erase.
zFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Viewing Short
Movies Created When Shooting Still
Images (Digest Movies)” (=
114) to
play a short movie, and press the [ ]
button to access the movie control panel.
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [ ] or [ ], and then press
the [ ] button to choose a clip.
2 Choose [ ].
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [ ], and then press the [ ]
button.
zThe selected clip is played back
repeatedly.
3 Conrm erasure.
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
zThe clip is erased, and the short movie is
overwritten.
●[ ] is not displayed if you select a clip when the camera is
connected to a printer.
Reducing File Sizes
Movie le sizes can be reduced by compressing movies as follows.
zOn the screen in step 2 of “Editing
Movies”, choose [ ]. Choose [New File],
and then press the [ ] button.
zChoose [Compress & Sav.], and then
press the [ ] button.
Image Quality of Compressed Movies
Before Compression After Compression
,
,
●[ ][ ] movies cannot be compressed.
●Edited movies cannot be saved in compressed format when you
choose [Overwrite].
●Compressing movies to [ ] or [ ] reduces the le
size while maintaining the same image quality.
136
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
1 Choose an image.
zChoose an image in single-image display.
zThemes available in step 3 will vary
depending on image shooting date and
Face ID information.
2 Access the home screen.
zPress the [ ] button.
zAfter [Busy] is displayed, the home
screen is displayed.
3 Preview an album.
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons to choose a
person or [Date] or [Event] as the album
theme, and then press the [ ] button.
zAfter [Loading] is displayed for a few
seconds, the album is played.
4 Save the album.
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Save Album as Movie], and then press
the [ ] button.
zOnce the album is saved, [Saved] is
displayed.
5 Play the album (=
110).
Viewing Albums (Story Highlights)
Still Images Movies
You can choose themes such as a date or person’s name to create an
album of automatically selected images that match the theme. These
images are combined into a slideshow that can be saved as a short movie
of about 2 – 3 minutes.
Before using this feature, make sure the battery pack is fully charged.
Creating albums also requires free space on the memory card. As a
guideline, use a memory card with a capacity of 16 GB or higher, and
ensure at least 1 GB of free space.
Choosing Themes for Albums
Press the [ ] button to access the home screen and choose the theme
for the camera to use when selecting album elements. Note that the
camera is more likely to add images tagged as favorites (=
126) to
albums.
Date
Creates an album of images shot on the same day.
Images are selected from those shot on the same day as
the image displayed before you access the home screen.
Person’s
name
Can be used to create monthly albums of people, such as
albums of children as they grow up.
Subjects whose Face ID information you registered before
shooting may be selected for albums.
Images selected are those that have the same subject
shot during the same month as the image displayed before
you access the home screen.
Event
A good choice for albums of vacations, parties, or other
events.
Images are selected from those shot during the event
before and after the image displayed before you access
the home screen.
Custom Includes images based on your specied images, dates, or
people registered in Face ID.
137
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Adding Background Music to Albums
Still Images Movies
Choose from seven kinds of background music to play during album
playback.
1 Register background music to a
memory card.
zFollowing steps 1 – 4 in “Viewing Albums
(Story Highlights)” (=
136), choose
[Music Settings] and press the [ ]
button.
zThe screen at left is displayed when
you use a new or recently formatted
memory card. Choose [OK] (either press
the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial),
press the [ ] button, and wait about four
minutes until the seven types of music
are registered to the card.
zWhen using a memory card with music
already registered to it, go to step 2.
2 Create the album.
zFollow steps 1 – 3 in “Viewing Albums
(Story Highlights)” (=
136) to create an
album.
3 Congure background music
settings.
zChoose the required item, press the
[ ] button, and then choose an option
(=
30).
4 Save the album.
zFollow step 4 in “Viewing Albums (Story
Highlights)” (=
136) to save albums.
●Albums can include following images captured by the camera.
- Still Images
- Digest movies (=
36), except compressed movies
- Short clips (=
74) of two seconds or longer, except
compressed movies
●Albums cannot be saved unless there is enough space on the
memory card.
●To jump to the next chapter during the preview, drag left, and to
jump to the previous chapter, drag right.
●You can specify the color effect in step 4 by choosing [Change
Color Effect] and pressing the [ ] button. To preview how the
album looks with your selected effect applied, choose [Preview
Album Again] on the screen in step 4 after pressing the [ ][ ]
buttons to choose a color effect and pressing the [ ] button.
●To play saved albums, choose [List of Albums] on the Story
Highlights home screen, press the [ ] button, choose a listed
album, and press the [ ] button again.
138
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Creating Your Own Albums
Still Images Movies
Create your own albums by choosing desired images.
1 Choose to create a Custom album.
zFollowing steps 1 – 3 in “Viewing Albums
(Story Highlights)” (=
136), choose
[Custom] and press the [ ] button.
2 Choose a selection method.
zChoose [Image Selection], [Date
Selection], or [Person Selection], and
then press the [ ] button.
3 Choose album elements.
zOnce you select the elements for your
album and press the [ ] button, your
selected elements are labeled with [ ].
zPress the [ ] button after you
nish selecting still images or short
clips in [Image Selection], dates in
[Date Selection], or people in [Person
Selection].
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Preview], and then press
the [ ] button.
●Once albums are saved, background music cannot be added
later. Background music in albums cannot be removed or
changed.
●Chapters of albums with background music cannot be edited
(=
135).
●If you prefer not to add background music, set [Add BGM] to [No]
on the screen in step 3.
●To use only background music instead of movie audio, set [Audio
Mixer] to [BGM only] on the screen in step 3.
●To listen to a sample of the background music selected in [Track],
choose [Sample BGM] on the screen in step 3 and press the [ ]
button.
139
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Combining Short Clips
Still Images Movies
Combine short clips to create a longer movie.
Note that movies created this way are not included in Story Highlights
albums (=
136).
1 Access the editing screen.
zPress the [ ] button, choose [Short
Clip Mix] on the [ 2] tab, and then
choose [Merge Clips] (=
30).
2 Specify clips to combine.
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose a clip to combine from the
top of the screen, and then press the [ ]
button.
zYour selected clip is displayed on the
bottom of the screen.
zTo cancel selection, press the [ ] button
again.
zRepeat these steps to specify other clips
to combine.
zAfter you are nished selecting clips,
press the [ ] button.
3 Preview the movie.
zChoose [Preview] and press the [ ]
button.
zAfter [Loading] is displayed for a few
seconds, a preview of the combined clips
is played.
4 Choose background music.
zWhen the screen at left is displayed,
choose [Music Settings]. Add background
music as described in “Adding
Background Music to Albums” (=
137),
and then press the [ ] button.
5 Choose a color effect.
zOn the screen in step 4 of “Viewing
Albums (Story Highlights)” (=
136),
choose [Change Color Effect].
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons to choose a
color effect, and then press the [ ]
button.
6 Save the album.
zFollow step 4 in “Viewing Albums (Story
Highlights)” (=
136) to save albums.
●You can specify up to 40 les (or 10 movie les) after choosing
[Image Selection]. From the second time you create a custom
album, [Select images based on previous settings?] is displayed.
If you choose [Yes], the previous still images or short clips are
labeled with [ ], and multiple images are displayed at once.
●Up to 15 dates can be selected if you choose [Date Selection].
140
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
4 Save the movie.
zChoose [Save], and then press the [ ]
button.
zOnce the movie is saved, [Saved] is
displayed.
5 Play the movie.
zChoose [Play Back Movie] on the
screen in step 1 to view a list of movies
you have created.
zChoose the movie to play and press the
[] button.
●From the second time you create a custom album, [Select images
based on previous settings?] is displayed. If you choose [Yes], the
editing screen is displayed with the short clips in the previously
selected order.
●To play the selected clip, move the zoom lever toward [ ] on the
screen in step 2.
●To rearrange clips, press the [ ] button on the screen in step 2,
select a clip, press the [ ] button, press the [ ][ ] buttons or
turn the [ ] dial, and then press the [ ] button again.
●To apply a color effect, choose [Change Color Effect] on the
screen in step 3.
●To add background music, choose [Music Settings] on the screen
in step 3 (=
137).
●The image quality of movies saved is [ ].
●Use a fully charged battery pack, if possible.
141
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Available Wi-Fi Features
You can send and receive images and control the camera remotely by
connecting it to these devices and services via Wi-Fi.
●Smartphones and Tablets
Send images to smartphones and tablet computers that have Wi-Fi
functions. You can also shoot remotely and geotag your shots from a
smartphone or tablet.
For convenience in this manual, smartphones, tablets, and other
compatible devices are collectively referred to as “smartphones”.
●Computer
Use software to save camera images to a computer connected via
Wi-Fi.
●Web Services
Add your account information to the camera for CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY online photography service or other Web services to
send camera images to the services. Unsent images on the camera
can also be sent to a computer or Web service via CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY.
●Printers
Send images wirelessly to a PictBridge-compatible printer (supporting
DPS over IP) to print them.
●Another Camera
Send images wirelessly between Wi-Fi-compatible Canon cameras.
Wi-Fi Functions
Send images wirelessly from the camera to a variety
of compatible devices, and use the camera with Web
services
●Before using Wi-Fi, be sure to read “Wi-Fi (Wireless LAN)
Precautions” (=
224).
142
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Sending Images to an NFC-Compatible
Smartphone
Use an Android (OS version 4.0 or later) smartphone’s NFC to simplify the
process of installing Camera Connect and connecting to the camera.
Operation when devices are initially connected via NFC varies depending
on the camera mode when the devices are touched together.
●If the camera is off or in Shooting mode when the devices are touched
together, you can choose and send images on the image selection
screen. Once the devices are connected, you can also shoot remotely
and geotag your shots (=
164). It is easy to reconnect to recent
devices, which are listed in the Wi-Fi menu.
●If the camera is in Playback mode when the devices are touched
together, you can choose and send images from the index display
shown for image selection.
Follow the instructions in the following section for NFC-initiated connection
to a camera that is off or in Shooting mode.
Connecting via NFC When Camera Is Off or in Shooting
Mode
1 Install Camera Connect.
zActivate NFC on the smartphone and
touch the devices’ N-Marks ( ) together
to start Google Play on the smartphone
automatically. Once the Camera Connect
download page is displayed, download
and install the app.
Sending Images to a Smartphone
There are several ways to connect the camera to a smartphone and send
images.
●Connect via NFC (=
142)
Simply touch an NFC-compatible Android smartphone (OS version 4.0
or later) against the camera to connect the devices.
●Connect via the Wi-Fi menu (=
144)
You can connect the camera to a smartphone as you would connect it
to a computer or other device. Multiple smartphones can be added.
Before connecting to the camera, you must install the free dedicated
Camera Connect app on the smartphone. For details on this application
(supported smartphones and included functions), refer to the Canon
website.
●Canon Wi-Fi-compatible camera owners who use CameraWindow
to connect their camera via Wi-Fi to a smartphone should
consider switching to the Camera Connect mobile app.
143
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
4 Send an image.
zTurn the [ ] dial to choose an image to
send, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Send this image], and then press the [ ]
button.
z[Transfer completed] is displayed after
the image is sent, and the image transfer
screen is displayed again.
zTo end the connection, press the
[] button, choose [OK] on the
conrmation screen (either press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
then press the [ ] button. You can
also use the smartphone to end the
connection.
●When using NFC, keep the following points in mind.
- Avoid strong impact between the camera and smartphone. This
may damage the devices.
- Depending on the smartphone, the devices may not recognize
each other immediately. In this case, try holding the devices
together in slightly different positions. If connection is not
established, keep the devices together until the camera screen
is updated.
- If you attempt connection when the camera is off, a message
may be displayed on the smartphone reminding you to turn on
the camera. If so, turn the camera on and touch the devices
together again.
- Do not place other objects between the camera and
smartphone. Also, note that camera or smartphone covers or
similar accessories may block communication.
●All images in the camera can be viewed from the connected
smartphone when you choose [Yes] in step 3. To keep camera
images private, so that they cannot be viewed from the
smartphone, choose [No] in step 3.
●Once you have registered a smartphone, you can change privacy
settings for it on the camera (=
165).
2 Establish the connection.
zMake sure the camera is off or in
Shooting mode.
zTouch the N-Mark ( ) on the smartphone
with Camera Connect installed against
the camera’s N-Mark.
zThe camera screen automatically
changes.
zIf the [Device Nickname] screen is
displayed, press the [ ][ ] buttons or
turn the [ ] dial to choose [OK], and then
press the [ ] button.
zCamera Connect is started on the
smartphone.
zThe devices are connected automatically.
3 Adjust the privacy setting.
zWhen this screen is displayed, press
the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [Yes], and then press the [ ]
button.
zYou can now use the smartphone to
browse, import, or geotag images on the
camera or shoot remotely.
144
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
●If during connection a message on the camera requests you to
enter the nickname, follow step 2 in “Connecting via NFC When
Camera Is Off or in Shooting Mode” (=
142) to enter it.
●The camera does not keep a record of smartphones you connect
to via NFC in Playback mode.
●You can preset images to transfer at your desired size (=
161).
Adding a Smartphone
These steps show how to use the camera as an access point, but you can
also use an existing access point (=
146).
1 Install Camera Connect.
zFor an iPhone or iPad, nd Camera
Connect in the App Store and download
and install the app.
zFor Android smartphones, nd Camera
Connect in Google Play and download
and install the app.
2 Access the Wi-Fi menu.
zPress the [ ] button.
zIf the [Device Nickname] screen is
displayed, choose [OK] (=
142).
3 Choose [ ].
zPress the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then press
the [ ] button.
●Connections require that a memory card be in the camera.
●You can also change the camera nickname on the screen in step
2 (=
32).
●Not all NFC-compatible smartphones have an N-Mark ( ). For
details, refer to the smartphone user manual.
●You can also send multiple images at once and change the image
size before sending (=
159).
●To disable NFC connections, choose MENU (=
30) ► [ 4] tab
► [Wireless settings] ► [Wi-Fi Settings] ► [NFC] ► [Off].
Connecting via NFC When Camera Is in Playback Mode
zPress the [ ] button to turn the camera
on.
zTouch the smartphone with Camera
Connect installed (=
142) against the
camera’s N-Mark ( ).
zPress the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose an image to send,
and then press the [ ] button. [ ] is
displayed.
zTo cancel selection, press the [ ] button
again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
zRepeat this process to choose additional
images.
zAfter you nish choosing images, press
the [ ] button, choose [OK], and
then press the [ ] button.
zPress the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [Send], and then
press the [ ] button.
zThe images are now sent.
145
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
8 Adjust the privacy setting.
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Yes], and then press the
[] button.
zYou can now use the smartphone to
browse, import, or geotag images on the
camera or shoot remotely.
9 Send an image.
zTurn the [ ] dial to choose an image to
send, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Send this image], and then press the [ ]
button.
z[Transfer completed] is displayed after
the image is sent, and the image transfer
screen is displayed again.
z
To end the connection, press the [ ]
button, choose [OK] on the conrmation
screen (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or
turn the [ ] dial), and then press the [ ]
button. You can also use the smartphone
to end the connection.
zTo add multiple smartphones, repeat the
above procedure starting from step 1.
●All images in the camera can be viewed from the connected
smartphone when you choose [Yes] in step 8. To keep camera
images private, so that they cannot be viewed from the
smartphone, choose [No] in step 8.
●Once you have registered a smartphone, you can change privacy
settings for it on the camera (=
165).
4 Choose [Add a Device].
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Add a Device], and then
press the [ ] button.
zThe camera SSID and password are
displayed.
5 Connect the smartphone to the
network.
zIn the smartphone’s Wi-Fi setting menu,
choose the SSID (network name)
displayed on the camera to establish a
connection.
zIn the password eld, enter the password
displayed on the camera.
6 Start Camera Connect.
zStart Camera Connect on the
smartphone.
7 Select the camera to connect to.
zOn the camera selection screen
displayed on the smartphone, choose the
camera to begin pairing.
146
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Using Another Access Point
When connecting the camera to a smartphone through the Wi-Fi menu,
you can also use an existing access point.
1 Prepare for the connection.
zAccess the [Waiting to connect] screen
by following steps 1 – 4 in “Adding a
Smartphone” (=
144).
2 Connect the smartphone to the
access point.
3 Choose [Switch Network].
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Switch Network], and then
press the [ ] button.
zA list of detected access points will be
displayed.
4 Connect to the access point.
zFor WPS-compatible access points,
connect to the access point and choose
the smartphone as described in steps
5 – 8 in “Using WPS-Compatible Access
Points” (=
149).
zFor non-WPS access points, follow steps
2 – 4 in “Connecting to Listed Access
Points” (=
151) to connect to the
access point and choose the smartphone.
5 Select the camera to connect to.
zOn the camera selection screen
displayed on the smartphone, choose the
camera to begin pairing.
●Connections require that a memory card be in the camera.
●Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent
connections will be listed rst when you access the Wi-Fi menu.
You can easily connect again by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons to
choose the device and then pressing the [ ] button. To add a
new device, display the device selection screen by pressing the
[][ ] buttons, and then congure the setting.
●If you prefer not to display recent target devices, choose MENU
(=
30) ► [ 4] tab ► [Wireless settings] ► [Wi-Fi Settings] ►
[Target History] ► [Off].
●To connect without entering a password in step 5, choose MENU
(=
30) ► [ 4] tab ► [Wireless settings] ► [Wi-Fi Settings] ►
[Password] ► [Off]. [Password] will no longer be displayed on the
SSID screen (in step 4).
●You can also send multiple images at once and change the image
size before sending (=
159).
147
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Saving Images to a Computer
Preparing to Register a Computer
For detailed system requirements and compatibility information, such
as computers that can be connected via Wi-Fi to the camera, including
support for new operating systems, visit the Canon website.
●Windows 7 Starter and Home Basic editions are not supported.
●Windows 7 N (European version) and KN (South Korean version)
require a separate download and installation of Windows Media
Feature Pack.
For details, check the following website.
http://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=159730
Installing the Software
Windows 7 and Mac OS X 10.9 are used here for the sake of illustration.
1 Download the software.
zVisit the following site from a computer
connected to the Internet.
http://www.canon.com/icpd/
zChoose your country or region, and
then follow the instructions displayed to
prepare for downloading.
zThe compressed software is now
downloaded to your computer.
6 Congure the privacy settings and
send images.
zFollow steps 8 – 9 in “Adding a
Smartphone” (=
144) to congure the
privacy settings and send images.
Previous Access Points
You can reconnect to any previous access points automatically by
following step 4 in “Adding a Smartphone” (=
144).
●To use the camera as an access point, choose [Switch Network] on the
screen displayed when you establish a connection, and then choose
[Camera Access Point Mode].
●To switch access points, choose [Switch Network] on the screen
displayed when you establish a connection, and then follow the
procedure in “Using Another Access Point” (=
146) from step 4.
148
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Congure the computer for a Wi-Fi connection (Windows
only)
On a computer running Windows, congure the following settings before
connecting the camera to the computer wirelessly.
1 Conrm that the computer is
connected to an access point.
zFor instructions on checking your network
connection, refer to the computer user
manual.
2 Congure the setting.
zClick in the following order: [Start] menu
► [All Programs] ► [Canon Utilities] ►
[CameraWindow] ► [Wi-Fi connection
setup].
zIn the application that opens, follow the
on-screen instructions and congure the
setting.
●The following Windows settings are congured when you run the
utility in step 2.
- Turn on media streaming.
This will enable the camera to see (nd) the computer to access
via Wi-Fi.
- Turn on network discovery.
This will enable the computer to see (nd) the camera.
- Turn on ICMP (Internet Control Message Protocol).
This allows you to check the network connection status.
- Enable Universal Plug & Play (UPnP).
This will enable network devices to detect each other
automatically.
●Some security software may prevent you from completing the
settings as described here. Check the settings of your security
software.
2 Begin the installation.
zDouble-click the downloaded le, and
when the screen at left is displayed, click
[Easy Installation]. Follow the on-screen
instructions to complete the installation
process.
zInstallation may take some time,
depending on computer performance and
the Internet connection.
zClick [Finish] or [Restart] on the screen
after installation.
●Internet access is required, and any ISP account charges and
access fees must be paid separately.
●To uninstall the software, follow these steps.
- Windows: Select [Start] menu ► [All Programs] ► [Canon
Utilities], and then choose the software for uninstallation.
- Mac OS: In the [Canon Utilities] folder within the [Applications]
folder, drag the folder of the software for uninstallation to the
Trash, and then empty the Trash.
149
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
●For information on WPS compatibility and for instructions on
checking settings, refer to the access point user manual.
●A router is a device that creates a network (LAN) structure for
connecting multiple computers. A router that contains an internal
Wi-Fi function is called a “Wi-Fi router”.
●This guide refers to all Wi-Fi routers and base stations as “access
points”.
●If you use MAC address ltering on your Wi-Fi network, be sure
to add the camera’s MAC address to your access point. You
can check your camera’s MAC address by choosing MENU
(=
30) ► [ 4] tab ► [Wireless settings] ► [Wi-Fi Settings] ►
[Check MAC Address].
Using WPS-Compatible Access Points
WPS makes it easy to complete settings when connecting devices over
Wi-Fi. You can use either Push Button Conguration Method or PIN
Method for settings on a WPS supported device.
1 Conrm that the computer is
connected to an access point.
zFor instructions on checking the
connection, refer to the device and
access point user manuals.
2 Access the Wi-Fi menu.
zPress the [ ] button.
Saving Images to a Connected Computer
Connect to your access point via Wi-Fi as follows.
Also refer to the access point user manual.
Conrming Access Point Compatibility
Conrm that the Wi-Fi router or base station conforms to the Wi-Fi
standards in “Camera” (=
217).
Connection methods vary depending on whether the access point
supports Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS, =
149) or not (=
151). For
non-WPS access points, check the following information.
●Network name (SSID/ESSID)
The SSID or ESSID for the access point you use. Also called the
“access point name” or “network name”.
●Network authentication / data encryption (encryption method /
encryption mode)
The method for encrypting data during wireless transmission. Check
which security setting is used: WPA2-PSK (AES), WPA2-PSK
(TKIP), WPA-PSK (AES), WPA-PSK (TKIP), WEP (open system
authentication), or no security.
●Password (encryption key / network key)
The key used when encrypting data during wireless transmission. Also
called the “encryption key” or “network key”.
●Key index (transmit key)
The key set when WEP is used for network authentication / data
encryption. Use “1” as the setting.
●If system administrator status is needed to adjust network
settings, contact the system administrator for details.
●These settings are very important for network security. Exercise
adequate caution when changing these settings.
150
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
7 Establish the connection.
zOn the access point, hold down the WPS
connection button for a few seconds.
zOn the camera, press the [ ] button to
go to the next step.
zThe camera connects to the access point
and lists devices connected to it on the
[Select a Device] screen.
8 Choose the target device.
zChoose the target device name (either
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial), and then press the [ ] button.
9 Install a driver (rst Windows
connection only).
zWhen this screen is displayed on the
camera, click the Start menu on the
computer, click [Control Panel], and then
click [Add a device].
zDouble-click the connected camera icon.
z
Driver installation will begin.
zAfter driver installation is complete, and
the camera and computer connection
is enabled, the AutoPlay screen will be
displayed. Nothing will be displayed on
the camera screen.
zIf the [Device Nickname] screen is
displayed, press the [ ][ ] buttons or
turn the [ ] dial to choose [OK], and then
press the [ ] button.
3 Choose [ ].
zPress the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
4 Choose [Add a Device].
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Add a Device], and then
press the [ ] button.
5 Choose [WPS Connection].
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [WPS Connection], and
then press the [ ] button.
6 Choose [PBC Method].
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [PBC Method], and then
press the [ ] button.
151
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
●Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent
destinations will be listed rst when you access the Wi-Fi menu.
You can easily connect again by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons to
choose the device and then pressing the [ ] button. To add a
new device, display the device selection screen by pressing the
[][ ] buttons, and then congure the setting.
●If you prefer not to display recent target devices, choose MENU
(=
30) ► [ 4] tab ► [Wireless settings] ► [Wi-Fi Settings] ►
[Target History] ► [Off].
●You can also change the camera nickname on the screen in step
2 (=
32).
●When the camera is connected to a computer, the camera screen
is blank.
●Mac OS: If CameraWindow is not displayed, click the
[CameraWindow] icon in the Dock.
●To disconnect from the camera, turn off the camera.
●If you chose [PIN Method] in step 6, a PIN code will be displayed
on the screen. Be sure to set this code in the access point.
Choose a device in the [Select a Device] screen. For further
details, refer to the user manual included with your access point.
Connecting to Listed Access Points
1 View the listed access points.
zView the listed networks (access points)
as described in steps 1 – 4 of “Using
WPS-Compatible Access Points”
(=
149).
2 Choose an access point.
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose a network (access point),
and then press the [ ] button.
10 Display CameraWindow.
zWindows: Access CameraWindow by
clicking [Downloads Images From Canon
Camera].
zMac OS: CameraWindow is automatically
displayed when a Wi-Fi connection is
established between the camera and
computer.
11 Import images.
zClick [Import Images from Camera], and
then click [Import Untransferred Images].
zImages are now saved to the Pictures
folder on the computer, in separate
folders named by date.
zClick [OK] in the screen that is displayed
after image import is complete.
zUse Digital Photo Professional to view
images you save to a computer. To view
movies, use preinstalled or commonly
available software compatible with
movies recorded by the camera.
152
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Previous Access Points
You can reconnect to any previous access points automatically by
following step 4 in “Using WPS-Compatible Access Points” (=
149).
●To connect to a device via an access point, conrm that the target
device is already connected to the access point, and then follow the
procedure from step 8 in “Using WPS-Compatible Access Points”
(=
149).
●To switch access points, choose [Switch Network] on the screen
displayed when you establish a connection, and then either follow
the procedure in “Using WPS-Compatible Access Points” (=
149)
from step 5 or the procedure in “Connecting to Listed Access Points”
(=
151) from step 2.
3 Enter the access point password.
zPress the [ ] button to access the
keyboard, and then enter the password
(=
32).
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Next], and then press the
[ ] button.
4 Choose [Auto].
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Auto], and then press the
[ ] button.
zTo save images to a connected computer,
follow the procedure from step 8 in
“Using WPS-Compatible Access Points”
(=
149).
●To determine the access point password, check on the access
point itself or refer to the user manual.
●If no access points are detected even after you choose [Refresh]
in step 2 to update the list, choose [Manual Settings] in step 2
to complete access point settings manually. Follow on-screen
instructions and enter an SSID, security settings, and a password.
●When you use an access point that you have already connected
to for connecting to another device, [*] is displayed for the
password in step 3. To use the same password, choose [Next]
(either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial) and press
the [ ] button.
153
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Registering CANON iMAGE GATEWAY
Link the camera and CANON iMAGE GATEWAY by adding CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY as a destination Web service on the camera. Note
that you will need to enter an email address used on your computer or
smartphone to receive a notication message for completing linkage
settings.
1 Access the Wi-Fi menu.
zPress the [ ] button.
zIf the [Device Nickname] screen is
displayed, press the [ ][ ] buttons or
turn the [ ] dial to choose [OK], and then
press the [ ] button.
2 Choose [ ].
zPress the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
3 Accept the agreement to enter an
email address.
zRead the displayed content, press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [I Agree], and then press the [ ]
button.
Sending Images to a Registered Web
Service
Registering Web Services
Use a smartphone or computer to add to the camera Web services that
you want to use.
●A smartphone or computer with a browser and Internet connection is
required to complete camera settings for CANON iMAGE GATEWAY
and other Web services.
●Check the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY website for details on browser
(Microsoft Internet Explorer, etc.) requirements, including settings and
version information.
●For information on countries and regions where CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY is available, visit the Canon website
(http://www.canon.com/cig/).
●You must have an account with Web services other than CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY if you desire to use them. For further details, check
the websites for each Web service you want to register.
●Separate ISP connection and access point fees may be applicable.
●CANON iMAGE GATEWAY also provides user guides for
downloading.
154
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
7 Check for the notication message.
zOnce information has been sent to
CANON iMAGE GATEWAY, you will
receive a notication message at the
email address entered in step 5.
zThe screen is displayed to notify that the
e-mail notication was sent. Press the
[] button.
z[] now changes to [ ].
8 Access the page in the notication
message and complete camera link
settings.
zFrom a computer or smartphone,
access the page linked in the notication
message.
zFollow the instructions to complete the
settings on the camera link settings page.
9 Complete CANON iMAGE GATEWAY
settings on the camera.
zPress the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
z[] (=
162) and CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY are now added as
destinations.
zYou can add other Web services,
as needed. In this case, follow the
instructions from step 2 in “Registering
Other Web Services” (=
155).
4 Establish a connection with an
access point.
zConnect to the access point as described
in steps 5 – 7 in “Using WPS-Compatible
Access Points” (=
149) or in steps 2 – 4
in “Connecting to Listed Access Points”
(=
151).
5 Enter your email address.
zOnce the camera is connected to CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY via the access point, a
screen is displayed for entering an email
address.
zEnter your e-mail address, press the
[][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [Next], and then press the [ ]
button.
6 Enter a four-digit number.
zEnter any four-digit number, press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [Next], and then press the [ ]
button.
zYou will need this four-digit number later
when setting up linkage with CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY in step 8.
155
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
3 Choose [ ].
zPress the [ ] button.
zPress the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
zThe Web service settings are now
updated.
●If any congured settings change, follow these steps again to
update the camera settings.
●Make sure initially that your computer or smartphone mail
application is not congured to block email from relevant domains,
which may prevent you from receiving the notication message.
●You can also change the camera nickname on the screen in step
1 (=
166).
●Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent
destinations will be listed rst when you access the menu. Press
the [ ][ ] buttons to access the device selection screen and then
congure the setting.
●Once a connection destination is assigned in Touch Actions
(=
127), you can automatically reconnect to a previous
destination simply by dragging across the screen with the
assigned gesture.
Registering Other Web Services
You can also add Web services besides CANON iMAGE GATEWAY to the
camera.
1 Log in to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY
and access the camera link settings
page.
zFrom a computer or smartphone, access
http://www.canon.com/cig/ to visit
CANON iMAGE GATEWAY.
2 Congure the Web service you want
to use.
zFollow the instructions displayed on the
smartphone or computer to set up the
Web service.
156
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
●Connections require that a memory card with saved images be in
the camera.
●You can also send multiple images at once, resize images, and
add comments before sending (=
159).
●To view images uploaded to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY on a
smartphone, try the dedicated Canon Online Photo Album app.
Download and install the Canon Online Photo Album app for
iPhones or iPads from the App Store or for Android devices from
Google Play.
Uploading Images to Web Services
1 Access the Wi-Fi menu.
zPress the [ ] button.
2 Choose the destination.
zChoose the Web service icon (either
press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial), and then press the [ ]
button.
zIf multiple recipients or sharing options
are used with a Web service, choose the
desired item on the [Select Recipient]
screen (either press the [ ][ ] buttons
or turn the [ ] dial), and then press the
[ ] button.
3 Send an image.
zTurn the [ ] dial to choose an image to
send, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Send this image], and then press the [ ]
button.
zWhen uploading to YouTube, read the
terms of service, choose [I Agree], and
then press the [ ] button.
zAfter the image is sent, [OK] is displayed
on the screen. Press the [ ] button to
return to the playback screen.
157
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
4 Connect the printer to the network.
zIn the printer’s Wi-Fi setting menu,
choose the SSID (network name)
displayed on the camera to establish a
connection.
zIn the password eld, enter the password
displayed on the camera.
5 Choose the printer.
zChoose the printer name (either press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
then press the [ ] button.
6 Choose an image to print.
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image.
7 Access the printing screen.
zPress the [ ] button, choose [ ] in
the menu (either press the [ ][ ][ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and then
press the [ ] button again.
8 Print the image.
zFor detailed printing instructions, see
“Printing Images” (=
184).
zTo end the connection, press the [ ]
button at step 6, choose [OK] on the
conrmation screen (either press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
then press the [ ] button.
Printing Images Wirelessly from a
Connected Printer
Connect the camera to a printer via Wi-Fi to print as follows.
These steps show how to use the camera as an access point, but you can
also use an existing access point (=
146).
1 Access the Wi-Fi menu.
zPress the [ ] button.
2 Choose [ ].
zPress the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
3 Choose [Add a Device].
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Add a Device], and then
press the [ ] button.
zThe camera SSID and password are
displayed.
158
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Sending Images to Another Camera
Connect two cameras via Wi-Fi and send images between them as
follows.
●Only Canon-brand cameras equipped with a Wi-Fi function can be
connected to wirelessly. You cannot connect to a Canon-brand camera
that does not have a Wi-Fi function, even if it supports FlashAir/Eye-Fi
cards.
1 Access the Wi-Fi menu.
zPress the [ ] button.
2 Choose [ ].
zPress the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
3 Choose [Add a Device].
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Add a Device], and then
press the [ ] button.
zFollow steps 1 – 3 on the target camera
too.
zCamera connection information will be
added when [Start connection on target
camera] is displayed on both camera
screens.
●Connections require that a memory card with saved images be in
the camera.
●Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent
destinations will be listed rst when you access the Wi-Fi menu.
You can easily connect again by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons to
choose the device and then pressing the [ ] button. To add a
new device, display the device selection screen by pressing the
[][ ] buttons, and then congure the setting.
●If you prefer not to display recent target devices, choose MENU
(=
30) ► [ 4] tab ► [Wireless settings] ► [Wi-Fi Settings] ►
[Target History] ► [Off].
●To connect without entering a password in step 4, choose MENU
(=
30) ► [ 4] tab ► [Wireless settings] ► [Wi-Fi Settings] ►
[Password] ► [Off]. [Password] will no longer be displayed on the
SSID screen (in step 3).
●To use another access point, follow steps 3 – 4 in “Using Another
Access Point” (=
146).
159
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Image Sending Options
You can choose multiple images to send at once and change the image
recording pixel setting (size) before sending. Some Web services also
enable you to annotate the images you send.
Sending Multiple Images
1 Choose [Select and send].
zOn the image transfer screen, press the
[ ][ ] buttons to choose [Select and
send], and then press the [ ] button.
2 Choose a selection method.
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose a selection method.
Choosing Images Individually
1 Choose [Select].
zFollowing step 2 in “Sending Multiple
Images” (=
159), choose [Select] and
press the [ ] button.
4 Send an image.
zTurn the [ ] dial to choose an image to
send, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Send this image], and then press the [ ]
button.
z[Transfer completed] is displayed after
the image is sent, and the image transfer
screen is displayed again.
zTo end the connection, press the
[] button, choose [OK] on the
conrmation screen (either press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
then press the [ ] button.
●Connections require that a memory card be in the camera.
●Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent
destinations will be listed rst when you access the Wi-Fi menu.
You can easily connect again by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons to
choose the device and then pressing the [ ] button. To add a
new device, display the device selection screen by pressing the
[][ ] buttons, and then congure the setting.
●If you prefer not to display recent target devices, choose MENU
(=
30) ► [ 4] tab ► [Wireless settings] ► [Wi-Fi Settings] ►
[Target History] ► [Off].
●You can also send multiple images at once and change the image
size before sending (=
159, =
161).
●Once a connection destination is assigned in Touch Actions
(=
127), you can automatically reconnect to a previous
destination simply by dragging across the screen with the
assigned gesture.
160
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
2 Choose images.
zFollow steps 2 – 3 in “Selecting a Range”
(=
122) to specify images.
zTo include movies, press the
[][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose [Incl.
Movies], and then press the [ ] button to
mark the option as selected ( ).
zPress the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
[OK], and then press the [ ] button.
3 Send the images.
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Send], and then press the
[ ] button.
Sending Favorite Images
Send only images tagged as favorites (=
126).
1 Choose [Favorite Images].
zFollowing step 2 in “Sending Multiple
Images” (=
159), choose [Favorite
Images] and press the [ ] button.
zAn image selection screen for favorites is
displayed. If you prefer not to include an
image, choose the image and press the
[] button to remove [ ].
zAfter you nish choosing images, press
the [ ] button, choose [OK], and
then press the [ ] button.
2 Send the images.
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Send], and then press the
[ ] button.
2 Choose an image.
zPress the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
an image to send, and then press the [ ]
button. [ ] is displayed.
zTo cancel selection, press the [ ] button
again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
zRepeat this process to choose additional
images.
zAfter you nish choosing images, press
the [ ] button.
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
3 Send the images.
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Send], and then press the
[ ] button.
●You can also choose images in step 2 by moving the zoom
lever twice toward [ ] to access single-image display and then
pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or turning the [ ] dial.
Selecting a Range
1 Choose [Select Range].
zFollowing step 2 in “Sending Multiple
Images” (=
159), choose [Select
Range] and press the [ ] button.
161
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Choosing the Number of Recording Pixels
(Image Size)
On the image transfer screen, choose [ ] by pressing the [ ][ ]
buttons, and then press the [ ] button. On the screen displayed, choose
the recording pixel setting (image size) by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons,
and then press the [ ] button.
●To send images at original size, select [No] as the resizing option.
●Choosing [ ] will resize images that are larger than the selected size
before sending.
●Movies cannot be resized.
●Image size can also be congured in MENU (=
30) ► [ 4] tab
► [Wireless settings] ► [Wi-Fi Settings] ► [Resize for Sending].
Adding Comments
Using the camera, you can add comments to images that you send
to e-mail addresses, social networking services, etc. The number of
characters and symbols that can be entered may differ depending on the
Web service.
1 Access the screen for adding
comments.
zOn the image transfer screen, choose
[ ] by pressing the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons,
and then press the [ ] button.
2 Add a comment (=
32).
3 Send the image.
●When a comment is not entered, the comment set in CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY is automatically sent.
●You can also annotate multiple images before sending them. The
same comment is added to all images sent together.
●In step 1, [Favorite Images] is not available unless you have
tagged images as favorites.
Notes on Sending Images
●Depending on the condition of the network you are using, it may take
a long time to send movies. Be sure to keep an eye on the camera
battery level.
●Web services may limit the number of images or length of movies you
can send.
●For movies that you do not compress (=
135), a separate,
compressed le is sent instead of the original le. Note that this may
delay transmission, and the le cannot be sent unless there is enough
space for it on the memory card.
●When sending movies to smartphones, note that the supported image
quality varies depending on the smartphone. For details, refer to the
smartphone user manual.
●On the screen, wireless signal strength is indicated by the following
icons.
[] high, [ ] medium, [ ] low, [ ] weak
●Sending images to Web services will take less time when resending
images you have already sent that are still on the CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY server.
162
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Preparing the Computer
Install and congure the software on the destination computer.
1 Install Image Transfer Utility.
zInstall Image Transfer Utility on a
computer connected to the Internet
(=
147).
zImage Transfer Utility can also be
downloaded from the Image Sync
settings page of CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY (=
153).
2 Register the camera.
zWindows: In the taskbar, right-click [ ],
and then click [Add new camera].
zMac OS: In the menu bar, click [ ], and
then click [Add new camera].
zA list of cameras linked to CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY is displayed. Choose
the camera from which images are to be
sent.
zOnce the camera is registered and the
computer is ready to receive images, the
icon changes to [ ].
Sending Images Automatically (Image
Sync)
Images on the memory card that have not been transferred already can
be sent to a computer or Web services via CANON iMAGE GATEWAY.
Note that images cannot be sent only to Web services.
Initial Preparations
Preparing the Camera
Register [ ] as the destination. On the destination computer, you will
install and congure Image Transfer Utility, a free software compatible with
Image Sync.
1 Add [ ] as a destination.
zAdd [ ] as a destination, as described in
“Registering CANON iMAGE GATEWAY”
(=
153).
zTo include a Web service as the
destination, log in to CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY (=
153), select your camera
model, access the Web service settings
screen, and choose the destination
Web service in Image Sync settings.
For details, refer to CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY Help.
2 Choose the type of images to send
(only when sending movies with
images).
zPress the [ ] button, choose
[Wireless settings] on the [ 4] tab, and
then choose [Wi-Fi Settings] (=
30).
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Image Sync], and then press the [ ][ ]
buttons to choose [Stills/Movies].
163
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Viewing Images Sent via Image Sync on a Smartphone
By installing the Canon Online Photo Album (Canon OPA) app, you can
use your smartphone to view and download images sent via Image Sync
while they are stored temporarily on the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY
server.
In preparation, enable smartphone access as follows.
●Make sure you have completed the settings described in “Preparing
the Computer” (=
162).
●Download and install the Canon Online Photo Album app for iPhones
or iPads from the App Store or for Android devices from Google Play.
●Log in to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY (=
153), select your camera
model, access the Web service settings screen, and enable viewing
and downloading from a smartphone in the Image Sync settings. For
details, refer to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY Help.
●Once images stored temporarily on the CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY server have been deleted, they can no longer be
viewed.
●Images you sent before enabling smartphone viewing and
downloading in Image Sync settings cannot be accessed this way.
●For Canon Online Photo Album instructions, refer to Canon
Online Photo Album Help.
Sending Images
Images sent from the camera are automatically saved to the computer.
If the computer that you intend to send images to is turned off, the images
will be stored temporarily on the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY server.
Stored images are regularly erased, so make sure to turn on the computer
and save the images.
1 Send images.
zFollow steps 1 – 2 in “Uploading Images to
Web Services” (=
156) and choose [ ].
zSent images are labeled with a [ ] icon.
2 Save the images to the computer.
zImages are automatically saved to the
computer when you turn it on.
zImages are automatically sent to Web
services from the CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY server, even if the computer
is off.
●Using a fully charged battery pack is recommended when sending
images.
●Even if images were imported to the computer through a different
method, any images not sent to the computer via CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY will be sent to the computer.
●Sending is faster when the destination is a computer on the same
network as the camera, because images are sent via the access
point instead of CANON iMAGE GATEWAY. Note that images
stored on the computer are sent to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY, so
the computer must be connected to the Internet.
164
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Shooting Remotely
As you check a shooting screen on your smartphone, you can use it to
shoot remotely.
1 Choose a shooting mode.
zTurn the mode dial to choose [ ], [ ],
[ ], [ ], or [ ] as the mode.
2 Secure the camera.
zOnce remote shooting begins, the
camera lens will come out. Lens motion
from zooming may also move the camera
out of position. Keep the camera still by
mounting it on a tripod or taking other
measures.
3 Connect the camera and
smartphone (=
144).
zIn the privacy settings, choose [Yes].
4 Choose remote shooting.
zIn Camera Connect on the smartphone,
choose remote shooting.
zThe camera lens will come out. Keep
your ngers away from the lens, and
make sure no objects will obstruct it.
zOnce the camera is ready for remote
shooting, a live image from the camera
will be displayed on the smartphone.
zAt this time, a message is displayed on
the camera, and all operations except
pressing the power button are disabled.
5 Shoot.
zUse the smartphone to shoot.
Using a Smartphone to View Camera
Images and Control the Camera
You can do the following with the dedicated smartphone app Camera
Connect.
●Browse images on the camera and save them to the smartphone
●Geotag images on the camera (=
164)
●Shoot remotely (=
164)
●Privacy settings must be congured in advance to allow image
viewing on the smartphone (=
144, =
165).
Geotagging Images on the Camera
GPS data recorded on a smartphone using the dedicated Camera
Connect application can be added to images on the camera. Images are
tagged with information including the latitude, longitude, and elevation.
●Before shooting, make sure the date and time and your home
time zone are set correctly, as described in “Setting the Date and
Time” (=
20). Also follow the steps in “World Clock” (=
172)
to specify any shooting destinations in other time zones.
●Others may be able to locate or identify you by using location data
in your geotagged still images or movies. Be careful when sharing
these images with others, as when posting images online where
many others can view them.
165
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Editing or Erasing Wi-Fi Settings
Edit or erase Wi-Fi settings as follows.
Editing Connection Information
1 Access the Wi-Fi menu and choose
a device to edit.
zPress the [ ] button.
zPress the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose the icon of a
device to edit, and then press the [ ]
button.
2 Choose [Edit a Device].
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Edit a Device], and then
press the [ ] button.
3 Choose the device to edit.
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose the device to edit, and then
press the [ ] button.
4 Choose the item to edit.
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose the item to edit, and then
press the [ ] button.
zThe items you can change depend on the
device or service.
●[ ] mode is used for shooting in modes other than [ ], [ ],
[], [ ], and [ ]. However, some Quick Set and MENU
settings you have congured in advance may be changed
automatically.
●Movie shooting is not available.
●Any jerky subject motion shown on the smartphone due to the
connection environment will not affect recorded images.
●Captured images are not transferred to the smartphone. Use the
smartphone to browse and import images from the camera.
166
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Changing the Camera Nickname
Change the camera nickname (displayed on connected devices) as
desired.
1 Choose [Wireless settings].
zPress the [ ] button and choose
[Wireless settings] on the [ 4] tab
(=
30).
2 Choose [Nickname].
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[ ] dial to choose [Nickname], and then
press the [ ] button.
3 Change the nickname.
zPress the [ ] button to access the
keyboard (=
32), and then enter a
nickname.
●A message is displayed if the nickname you enter begins with
a symbol or space. Press the [ ] button and enter a different
nickname.
●You can also change the nickname from the [Device Nickname]
screen displayed when you rst use Wi-Fi. In this case, select the
text box, press the [ ] button to access the keyboard, and then
enter a new nickname.
Congurable Items
Connection
Web
Services
[Change Device Nickname]
(=
166)
OOOO
–
[View Settings] (=
144) –
O
– – –
[Erase Connection Info] (=
166)
OOOO
–
O
: Congurable – : Not congurable
Changing a Device Nickname
You can change the device nickname (display name) that is displayed on
the camera.
zFollowing step 4 in “Editing Connection
Information” (=
165), choose [Change
Device Nickname] and press the [ ]
button.
zSelect the input eld and press the [ ]
button. Use the keyboard displayed to
enter a new nickname (=
32).
Erasing Connection Information
Erase connection information (information about devices that you have
connected to) as follows.
zFollowing step 4 in “Editing Connection
Information” (=
165), choose [Erase
Connection Info] and press the [ ]
button.
zAfter [Erase?] is displayed, press the
[][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [OK], and then press the [ ]
button.
zThe connection information will be
erased.
167
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Returning the Wi-Fi Settings to Default
Return the Wi-Fi settings to default if you transfer ownership of the
camera to another person, or dispose of it.
Resetting the Wi-Fi settings will also clear all Web service settings. Be
sure that you want to reset all Wi-Fi settings before using this option.
1 Choose [Wireless settings].
zPress the [ ] button and choose
[Wireless settings] on the [ 4] tab
(=
30).
2 Choose [Reset Settings].
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Reset Settings], and then
press the [ ] button.
3 Restore the default settings.
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
zThe Wi-Fi settings are now reset.
●To reset other settings (aside from Wi-Fi) to defaults, choose
[Reset All] on the [ 4] tab (=
176).
168
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Adjusting Basic Camera Functions
MENU (=
30) settings on the [ 1], [ 2], [ 3], and [ 4] tabs can be
congured. Customize commonly used functions as desired, for greater
convenience.
Date-Based Image Storage
Instead of saving images in folders created each month, you can have the
camera create folders each day you shoot to store shots taken that day.
zChoose [Create Folder] on the [ 1] tab,
and then choose [Daily].
zImages will now be saved in folders
created on the shooting date.
File Numbering
Your shots are automatically numbered in sequential order (0001 – 9999)
and saved in folders that store up to 2,000 images each. You can change
how the camera assigns le numbers.
zChoose [File Numbering] on the [ 1] tab,
and then choose an option.
Continuous
Images are numbered consecutively (until the 9999th
shot is taken/saved) even if you switch memory
cards.
Auto Reset Image numbering is reset to 0001 if you switch
memory cards, or when a new folder is created.
Setting Menu
Customize or adjust basic camera functions for
greater convenience
169
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
●Formatting or erasing data on a memory card only changes le
management information on the card and does not erase the data
completely. When transferring or disposing of memory cards,
take steps to protect personal information if necessary, such as
physically destroying the cards.
●The total card capacity indicated on the formatting screen may be
less than the advertised capacity.
Low-Level Formatting
Perform low-level formatting in the following cases: [Memory card error] is
displayed, the camera is not working correctly, card image reading/writing
is slower, continuous shooting is slower, or movie recording suddenly
stops. Low-level formatting erases all data on a memory card. Before low-
level formatting, copy images on the memory card to a computer, or take
other steps to back them up.
zOn the screen in step 2 of “Formatting
Memory Cards” (=
169), press the [ ]
button to choose [Low Level Format]. A
[ ] icon is displayed.
zFollow step 2 in “Formatting Memory
Cards” (=
169) to continue with the
formatting process.
●Low-level formatting takes longer than “Formatting Memory
Cards” (=
169), because data is erased from all storage regions
of the memory card.
●You can cancel low-level formatting in progress by choosing
[Stop]. In this case, all data will be erased, but the memory card
can be used normally.
●Regardless of the option selected in this setting, shots may be
numbered consecutively after the last number of existing images
on newly inserted memory cards. To start saving shots from 0001,
use an empty (or formatted, =
169) memory card.
Formatting Memory Cards
Before using a new memory card or a card formatted in another device,
you should format the card with this camera.
Formatting erases all data on a memory card. Before formatting, copy
images on the memory card to a computer, or take other steps to back
them up.
1 Access the [Format] screen.
zChoose [Format] on the [ 1] tab, and
then press the [ ] button.
2 Choose [OK].
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
3 Restore the default settings.
zTo begin the formatting process, press
the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial
to choose [OK], and then press the [ ]
button.
zWhen formatting is nished, [Memory
card formatting complete] is displayed.
Press the [ ] button.
170
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Resetting the Electronic Level
Restore the electronic level to its original state as follows. Note that this is
not possible unless you have calibrated the electronic level.
zChoose [Electronic Level] on the [ 1] tab,
and then press the [ ] button.
zChoose [Reset], and then press the [ ]
button.
zChoose [OK], and then press the [ ]
button.
Start-Up Screen
Customize the start-up screen shown after you turn the camera on as
follows.
zChoose [Start-up Image] on the [ 1] tab,
and then press the [ ] button.
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an option.
Changing the Video System
Set the video system of any television used for display. This setting
determines the image quality (frame rate) available for movies.
zChoose [Video system] on the [ 1] tab,
and then choose an option.
Electronic Level Calibration
Calibrate the electronic level if it seems ineffective in helping you level the
camera.
For greater calibration accuracy, display grid lines (=
106) to help you
level the camera in advance.
1 Make sure the camera is level.
zPlace the camera on a at surface, such
as a table.
2 Calibrate the electronic level.
zChoose [Electronic Level] on the [ 1] tab,
and then press the [ ] button.
zTo adjust left/right tilt, choose [Horizontal
Roll Calibration], and to adjust forward/
backward tilt, choose [Vertical Pitch
Calibration], followed by the [ ] button. A
conrmation message is displayed.
zChoose [OK], and then press the [ ]
button.
171
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
●To conserve battery power, you should normally choose [On] for
[Auto Power Down] and [1 min.] or less for [Display Off].
●The [Display Off] setting is applied even if you set [Auto Power
Down] to [Off].
●These power-saving functions are not available when you have
set Eco mode (=
171) to [On].
Screen Brightness
Adjust screen brightness as follows.
zChoose [Disp. Brightness] on the [ 2]
tab, press the [ ] button, and then press
the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
adjust the brightness.
●For maximum brightness, press and hold [ ] for at least one
second when the shooting screen is displayed or when in single-
image display. (This will override the [Disp. Brightness] setting
on the [ 2] tab.) To restore the original brightness, press and
hold the [ ] button again for at least one second or restart the
camera.
Using Eco Mode
This function allows you to conserve battery power in Shooting mode.
When the camera is not in use, the screen quickly darkens to reduce
battery consumption.
1 Congure the setting.
zChoose [Eco Mode] on the [ 2] tab, and
then choose [On].
z[] is now shown on the shooting
screen (=
197).
zThe screen darkens when the camera
is not used for approximately two
seconds; approximately ten seconds
after darkening, the screen turns off.
The camera turns off after approximately
three minutes of inactivity.
2 Shoot.
zTo activate the screen and prepare for
shooting when the screen is off but the
lens is still out, press the shutter button
halfway.
Power-Saving Adjustment
Adjust the timing of automatic camera and screen deactivation (Auto
Power Down and Display Off, respectively) as needed (=
27).
zChoose [Power Saving] on the [ 2] tab,
and then press the [ ] button.
zChoose an item, press the [ ] button,
and then press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to congure the setting.
172
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
zTo set daylight saving time (1 hour
ahead), choose [ ] by pressing the
[ ][ ] buttons or turning the [ ] dial,
and then choose [ ] by pressing the
[ ][ ] buttons.
zPress the [ ] button.
2 Switch to the destination time zone.
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [ World], and then press
the [ ] button.
z[] is now shown on the shooting screen
(=
197).
●Adjusting the date or time while in [ ] mode (=
21) will
automatically update your [ Home] time and date.
Date and Time
Adjust the date and time as follows.
zChoose [Date/Time] on the [ 2] tab, and
then press the [ ] button.
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
option, and then adjust the setting, either
by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or turning
the [ ] dial.
Switching the Color of Screen Information
Still Images Movies
Information displayed on the screen and menus can be changed to a color
suitable for shooting under low-light conditions. Enabling this setting is
useful in modes such as [ ] (=
65).
zChoose [Night Display] on the [ 2] tab,
and then choose [On] (=
30).
zTo restore the original display, choose
[Off].
●You can also return the setting to [Off] by holding down the
[] button for at least one second on the shooting screen or in
Playback mode during single-image display.
World Clock
To ensure that your shots will have the correct local date and time when
you travel abroad, simply register the destination in advance and switch to
that time zone. This convenient feature eliminates the need to change the
Date/Time setting manually.
Before using the world clock, be sure to set the date and time and your
home time zone, as described in “Setting the Date and Time” (=
20).
1 Specify your destination.
zChoose [Time Zone] on the [ 2] tab, and
then press the [ ] button.
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [ World], and then press
the [ ] button.
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the
destination.
173
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Silencing Camera Operations
Silence camera sounds and movies as follows.
zChoose [Mute] on the [ 3] tab, and then
choose [On].
●Operation can also be silenced by holding down the [ ] button
as you turn the camera on.
●Sound is not played during movies (=
110) if you mute camera
sounds. To restore sound during movies, press the [ ] button or
drag up across the screen. Adjust volume as needed by pressing
the [ ][ ] buttons or by dragging up or down quickly.
Adjusting the Volume
Adjust the volume of individual camera sounds as follows.
zChoose [Volume] on the [ 3] tab, and
then press the [ ] button.
zChoose an item, and then press the
[][ ] buttons to adjust the volume.
Lens Retraction Timing
The lens is normally retracted for safety about one minute after you press
the [ ] button in Shooting mode (=
26). To have the lens retracted
immediately after you press the [ ] button, set the retraction timing to
[0 sec.].
zChoose [Lens Retraction] on the [ 2] tab,
and then choose [0 sec.].
Display Language
Change the display language as needed.
zChoose [Language ] on the [ 3] tab,
and then press the [ ] button.
zPress the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose a language, and
then press the [ ] button.
●You can also access the [Language] screen in Playback mode by
pressing and holding the [ ] button and immediately pressing
the [ ] button.
174
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Listing Shooting Modes by Icon
List shooting modes on the selection screen by icon only, without mode
names, for faster selection.
zChoose [Mode icon size/info] on the [ 3]
tab, and then choose [Small, no info].
Adjusting the Touch-Screen Panel
Sensitivity of the touch-screen panel can be increased to respond to a
lighter touch, or you can disable touch control.
zChoose [ 4] tab ► [Touch Operation],
and then choose the desired option.
zTo increase touch-screen panel
sensitivity, choose [Sensitive], and to
disable touch control, choose [Disable].
Customizing Sounds
Customize camera operating sounds as follows.
zChoose [Sound Options] on the [ 3] tab,
and then press the [ ] button.
zChoose an item, and then press the
[][ ] buttons to change the sound.
●The shutter sound in digest movies recorded in [ ] mode
(=
36) cannot be changed.
Hiding Hints and Tips
Hints and tips are normally shown when you choose Quick Set menu
(=
29) items. If you prefer, you can deactivate this information.
zChoose [Hints & Tips] on the [ 3] tab,
and then choose [Off].
175
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Setting Copyright Information to Record in
Images
To record the author’s name and copyright details in images, set this
information beforehand as follows.
zChoose [Copyright Info] on the [ 4] tab,
and then press the [ ] button.
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Enter Author’s Name] or
[Enter Copyright Details]. Press the [ ]
button to access the keyboard, and enter
the name (=
32).
zPress the [ ] button. When [Accept
changes?] is displayed, press the [ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose
[Yes], and then press the [ ] button.
zThe information set here will now be
recorded in images.
●To check the information entered, choose [Display Copyright Info]
on the screen above, and then press the [ ] button.
Deleting All Copyright Information
You can delete both the author’s name and copyright details at the same
time as follows.
zFollow the steps in “Setting Copyright
Information to Record in Images”
(=
175) and choose [Delete Copyright
Info].
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
●The copyright info already recorded in images will not be deleted.
Metric / Non-Metric Display
Change the unit of measurement shown in the zoom bar (=
34), the
MF indicator (=
87), and elsewhere from m/cm to ft/in as needed.
zChoose [Units] on the [ 4] tab, and then
choose [ft/in].
Checking Certication Logos
Some logos for certication requirements met by the camera can be
viewed on the screen. Other certication logos are printed in this guide, on
the camera packaging, or on the camera body.
zChoose [Certication Logo Display] on
the [ 4] tab, and then press the [ ]
button.
176
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Adjusting Other Settings
The following settings can also be adjusted.
●[Wireless settings] on the [ 4] tab (=
141)
Restoring Default Camera Settings
If you accidentally change a setting, you can restore default camera
settings.
1 Access the [Reset All] screen.
zChoose [Reset All] on the [ 4] tab, and
then press the [ ] button.
2 Restore default settings.
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
zDefault settings are now restored.
●The following functions are not restored to default settings.
- Information registered using Face ID (=
45)
- [1] tab setting [Video system] (=
170)
- [2] tab settings [Time Zone] (=
172), [Date/Time] (=
172),
and [ 3] tab setting [Language ] (=
173)
- Custom white balance data you have recorded (=
83)
- Shooting Mode
- Exposure compensation (=
78) setting
- Movie mode (=
72)
- Wi-Fi settings (=
141)
- Calibrated value for the electronic level (=
170)
- Copyright information (=
175)
177
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Use of genuine Canon accessories is recommended.
This product is designed to achieve excellent performance when used
with genuine Canon accessories.
Canon shall not be liable for any damage to this product and/or accidents
such as re, etc., caused by the malfunction of non-genuine Canon
accessories (e.g., a leakage and/or explosion of a battery pack). Please
note that any repairs your Canon product may require as a result of such
malfunction are not covered under warranty and will incur a fee. We
appreciate your understanding in advance.
Accessories
Enjoy the camera in more ways with optional Canon
accessories and other compatible accessories sold
separately
System Map
Wrist Strap Battery Pack
NB-13L*1
Battery Charger
CB-2LH/CB-2LHE*1
USB Cable (camera end: Micro-B)*2
Memory Card Card Reader Computer
TV/Video
System
Included Accessories
Power
HDMI cable
(camera end: Type D)*3
Flash Units
PictBridge-Compatible
Printers
High-Power Flash
HF-DC2
Waterproof Case
WP-DC55
Compact Power
Adapter
CA-DC30/CA-DC30E
Connect Station
CS100*4
Cases
*1 Also available for purchase separately.
*2 A genuine Canon accessory is also available (Interface Cable IFC-600PCU).
*3 Use a commercially available cable no longer than 2.5 m (8.2 ft.).
*4 Use the latest rmware version.
178
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Compact Power Adapter CA-DC30/
CA-DC30E
zInsert the included battery pack into the
camera for charging. Interface Cable IFC-
600PCU (sold separately) is required to
connect the adapter to the camera.
Flash
High-Power Flash HF-DC2
zExternal ash for illuminating subjects
that are out of range of the built-in ash.
High-Power Flash HF-DC1 can also be
used.
Other Accessories
Waterproof Case WP-DC55
zFor underwater photography at depths of
up to 40 meters (130 ft.). Also useful for
shooting in the rain, at the beach, or on
ski slopes.
Interface Cable IFC-600PCU
zFor connecting the camera to a computer
or printer.
Optional Accessories
The following camera accessories are sold separately. Note that some
accessories may no longer be available. Also, the availability may vary
depending on the region.
Power Supplies
Battery Pack NB-13L
zRechargeable lithium-ion battery
Battery Charger CB-2LH/CB-2LHE
zCharger for Battery Pack NB-13L
●The message [Battery communication error.] is displayed if you
use a non-genuine Canon battery pack, and user response is
required. Note that Canon shall not be liable for any damages
resulting from accidents, such as malfunction or re, that occur
due to use of non-genuine Canon battery packs.
●The charger can be used in areas with 100 – 240 V AC power
(50/60 Hz).
●For power outlets in a different format, use a commercially
available adapter for the plug. Never use an electrical transformer
designed for traveling, which may damage the battery pack.
●The battery pack includes a convenient cover which you can
attach to know the charge status at a glance. Attach the cover so
that ▲ is visible on a charged battery pack, and attach it so that
▲ is not visible on an uncharged battery pack.
179
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Using Optional Accessories
Playback on a TV
Still Images Movies
You can view your shots on a TV by connecting the camera to an HDTV
with a commercially available HDMI cable (not exceeding 2.5 m / 8.2
ft., with a Type D terminal on the camera end). Movies shot at an image
quality of [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], or
[] can be viewed in high denition.
For details on connection or how to switch inputs, refer to the TV manual.
1 Make sure the camera and TV are
off.
2 Connect the camera to the TV.
zOn the TV, insert the cable plug fully into
the HDMI input as shown.
zOn the camera, open the terminal cover
and insert the cable plug fully into the
camera terminal.
Printers
Canon-Brand PictBridge-Compatible
Printers
zEven without using a computer, you can
print images by connecting the camera
directly to a printer.
For details, visit your nearest Canon
retailer.
Photo and Movie Storage
Connect Station CS100
zA media hub for storing camera images,
viewing on a connected TV, printing
wirelessly on a Wi-Fi-compatible printer,
sharing over the Internet, and more.
180
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Inserting and Charging the Battery Pack
Charge the battery pack by using the supplied battery pack with an
optional Compact Power Adapter CA-DC30/CA-DC30E and Interface
Cable IFC-600PCU.
1 Insert the battery pack.
zFollow step 1 in “Inserting the Battery
Pack and Your Memory Card” (=
19)
to open the cover.
zInsert the battery pack as described in
step 2 of “Inserting the Battery Pack and
Your Memory Card” (=
19).
zFollow step 4 in “Inserting the Battery
Pack and Your Memory Card” (=
19)
to close the cover.
2 Connect the compact power adapter
to the camera.
zWith the camera turned off, open the
cover (1). Hold the smaller plug of the
interface cable (sold separately) facing
as shown and insert the plug fully into the
camera terminal (2).
zInsert the larger plug of the interface
cable into the compact power adapter.
(1)
(2)
3 Turn the TV on and switch to
external input.
zSwitch the TV input to the external input
you connected the cable to in step 2.
4 Turn the camera on.
zPress the [ ] button.
zImages from the camera are now
displayed on the TV. (Nothing is
displayed on the camera screen.)
zWhen nished, turn off the camera and
TV before disconnecting the cable.
●Touch-screen operations are not supported while the camera is
connected to a television.
●Some information may not be available when using a TV as the
display (=
198).
●Camera operating sounds are not played while the camera is
connected to an HDTV.
●When the camera and TV are connected, you can also shoot
while previewing shots on the larger screen of the TV. To shoot,
follow the same steps as when using the camera screen.
However, MF-Point Zoom (=
87), MF Peaking (=
88) and
Night Display (=
172) are not available.
181
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
●For details on charging time and the number of shots and
recording time possible with a fully charged battery pack, see
“Number of Shots/Recording Time, Playback Time” (=
219).
●You can view images even while the battery is charging, by
turning the camera on and entering Playback mode (=
24).
However, you cannot shoot while the battery is charging.
●If the USB charge lamp does not light up, remove the interface
cable and insert the cable again.
●Charged battery packs gradually lose their charge, even when
they are not used. Charge the battery pack on (or immediately
before) the day of use.
●The charger can be used in areas with 100 – 240 V AC power
(50/60 Hz). For power outlets in a different format, use a
commercially available adapter for the plug. Never use an
electrical transformer designed for traveling, which may damage
the battery pack.
Using a Computer to Charge the Battery
You can also charge the battery pack by inserting the larger plug of the
interface cable into a computer’s USB terminal in step 2 of “Inserting and
Charging the Battery Pack” (=
180). For details about USB connections
on the computer, refer to the computer user manual.
●Charging is not possible when the camera is off.
●With some computers, battery charging may require the memory
card to be in the camera. Insert the memory card in the camera
(=
19) before connecting the cable to the computer’s USB
port.
3 Charge the battery pack.
zCA-DC30: Flip out the plug (1) and plug
the compact power adapter into a power
outlet (2).
zCA-DC30E: Plug the power cord into the
compact power adapter, then plug the
other end into a power outlet.
zCharging begins and the USB charge
lamp lights up.
zThe lamp turns off when charging
nishes.
zRemove the compact power adapter from
the power outlet and the interface cable
from the camera.
●To protect the battery pack and keep it in optimal condition, do not
charge it continuously for more than 24 hours.
●When charging another battery, ensure that the interface cable is
removed from the camera before replacing the battery to charge.
182
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Computer Connections via a Cable
Checking Your Computer Environment
For detailed system requirements and compatibility information on
computers for using the software, including support for new operating
systems, visit the Canon website.
Installing the Software
For software installation instructions, see “Installing the Software”
(=
147).
Saving Images to a Computer
Using a USB cable (sold separately; camera end: Micro-B), you can
connect the camera to the computer and save images to the computer.
1 Connect the camera to the
computer.
zWith the camera turned off, open the
cover. With the smaller plug of the cable
in the orientation shown, insert the plug
fully into the camera terminal.
zConnect the larger cable plug to the
computer. For details on computer
connections, refer to the computer user
manual.
Using the Software
To utilize the features of the following software, download the software
from the Canon website and install it on your computer.
●CameraWindow
- Import images to your computer
- Register Picture Styles saved on the computer to the camera
●Image Transfer Utility
- Set up Image Sync (=
162) and receive images
●Map Utility
- Use a map to view GPS information that has been added to images
●Digital Photo Professional
- Browse, process and edit RAW images
●Picture Style Editor
- Edit Picture Styles and create and save Picture Style les
●To view and edit movies on a computer, use preinstalled or
commonly available software compatible with movies recorded by
the camera.
●Image Transfer Utility can also be downloaded from the Image
Sync settings page of CANON iMAGE GATEWAY.
183
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
●Windows 7: If the screen in step 2 is not displayed, click the [ ]
icon in the taskbar.
●Mac OS: If CameraWindow is not displayed after step 2, click the
[CameraWindow] icon in the Dock.
●Although you can save images to a computer simply by
connecting your camera to the computer without using the
software, the following limitations apply.
- It may take a few minutes after you connect the camera to the
computer until camera images are accessible.
- Images shot in vertical orientation may be saved in horizontal
orientation.
- RAW images (or JPEG images recorded with RAW images)
may not be saved.
- Image protection settings may be cleared from images saved
to a computer.
- Some problems may occur when saving images or image
information, depending on the operating system version, the
software in use, or image le sizes.
2 Turn the camera on to access
CameraWindow.
zPress the [ ] button.
zMac OS: CameraWindow is displayed
when a connection is established
between the camera and computer.
zWindows: Follow the steps introduced
below.
zIn the screen that is displayed, click the
change program link of [ ].
zChoose [Downloads Images From Canon
Camera] and then click [OK].
zDouble-click [ ].
3 Save the images to the computer.
zClick [Import Images from Camera], and
then click [Import Untransferred Images].
zImages are now saved to the Pictures
folder on the computer, in separate
folders named by date.
zAfter images are saved, close
CameraWindow, press the [ ] button to
turn the camera off, and unplug the cable.
zTo view images you save to a computer,
use preinstalled or commonly available
software compatible with images
captured by the camera.
184
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
5 Access the printing screen.
zPress the [ ] button, choose [ ], and
press the [ ] button again.
6 Print the image.
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Print], and then press the
[ ] button.
zPrinting now begins.
zTo print other images, repeat the above
procedures starting from step 4 after
printing is nished.
zWhen you are nished printing, turn the
camera and printer off and disconnect
the cable.
●For Canon-brand PictBridge-compatible printers (sold separately),
see “Printers” (=
179).
Printing Images
Still Images Movies
Print your shots and congure a variety of settings used for your printer
or photo printing services by connecting the camera to a PictBridge-
compatible printer with a cable.
A Canon SELPHY CP printer is used in this example of PictBridge
printing. Also refer to your printer user manual.
Easy Print
Still Images Movies
Print your shots by connecting the camera to a PictBridge-compatible
printer with a USB cable (sold separately; camera end: Micro-B).
1 Make sure the camera and printer
are off.
2 Connect the camera to the printer.
zOpen the terminal cover. Holding the
smaller cable plug in the orientation
shown, insert the plug fully into the
camera terminal.
zConnect the larger cable plug to the
printer. For other connection details, refer
to the printer manual.
3 Turn the printer on.
4 Choose an image.
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image.
185
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Cropping Images before Printing
Still Images Movies
By cropping images before printing, you can print a desired image area
instead of the entire image.
1 Choose [Cropping].
zAfter following step 1 in “Conguring Print
Settings” (=
185) to access the printing
screen, choose [Cropping] and press the
[ ] button.
zA cropping frame is now displayed,
indicating the image area to print.
2 Adjust the cropping frame as
needed.
zTo resize the frame, move the zoom
lever.
zTo move the frame, press the
[][ ][ ][ ] buttons.
zTo rotate the frame, turn the [ ] dial.
zWhen nished, press the [ ] button.
3 Print the image.
zFollow step 6 in “Easy Print” (=
184)
to print.
●Cropping may not be possible at small image sizes, or at some
aspect ratios.
Conguring Print Settings
Still Images Movies
1 Access the printing screen.
zFollow steps 1 – 5 in “Easy Print”
(=
184) to access this screen.
2 Congure the settings.
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an item, and then press
the [ ] button. On the next screen,
choose an option (either press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
then press the [ ] button to return to the
printing screen.
Default Matches current printer settings.
Date Prints images with the date added.
File No. Prints images with the le number added.
Both Prints images with both the date and le
number added.
Off –
Default Matches current printer settings.
Off –
On Uses information from the time of shooting to
print under optimal settings.
Red-Eye1
Corrects red-eye.
No. of
Copies Choose the number of copies to print.
Cropping –Specify a desired image area to print (=
185).
Paper
Settings –Specify the paper size, layout, and other details
(=
186).
186
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Available Layout Options
Default Matches current printer settings.
Bordered Prints with blank space around the image.
Borderless Borderless, edge-to-edge printing.
N-up Choose how many images to print per sheet.
ID Photo
Prints images for identication purposes.
Only available for images with a recording pixel setting of
L and an aspect ratio of 3:2.
Fixed Size Choose the print size.
Choose from 3.5 x 5 in., postcard, or wide-format prints.
Printing ID Photos
Still Images Movies
1 Choose [ID Photo].
zFollowing steps 1 – 4 in “Choosing
Paper Size and Layout before Printing”
(=
186), choose [ID Photo] and press
the [ ] button.
2 Choose the long and short side
length.
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an item, and then press
the [ ] button. On the next screen,
choose the length (either press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
then press the [ ] button.
Choosing Paper Size and Layout before Printing
Still Images Movies
1 Choose [Paper Settings].
zAfter following step 1 in “Conguring Print
Settings” (=
185) to access the printing
screen, choose [Paper Settings] and
press the [ ] button.
2 Choose a paper size.
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an option, and then press
the [ ] button.
3 Choose a type of paper.
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an option, and then press
the [ ] button.
4 Choose a layout.
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an option.
zWhen choosing [N-up], press the [ ]
button. On the next screen, choose the
number of images per sheet (either press
the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial),
and then press the [ ] button.
5 Print the image.
187
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
●To cancel printing in progress, press the [ ] button, choose [OK],
and then press the [ ] button again.
●After displaying a scene to print as described in steps 2 – 5 of
“Viewing” (=
110), you can also access the screen in step 1
here by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ] in the movie
control panel and then pressing the [ ] button.
Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF)
Still Images Movies
Batch printing (=
189) and ordering prints from a photo development
service can be set up on the camera. Choose up to 998 images on a
memory card and congure relevant settings, such as the number of
copies, as follows. The printing information you prepare this way will
conform to DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) standards.
●RAW images cannot be included in print list.
3 Choose the printing area.
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Cropping], and then press
the [ ] button.
zFollow step 2 in “Cropping Images before
Printing” (=
185) to choose the printing
area.
4 Print the image.
Printing Movie Scenes
Still Images Movies
1 Access the printing screen.
zFollow steps 1 – 5 in “Easy Print”
(=
184) to choose a movie. The screen
at left is displayed.
2 Choose a printing method.
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ],
and then press the [ ] button. On the
next screen, choose an option (either
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial), and then press the [ ] button to
return to the printing screen.
3 Print the image.
Movie Printing Options
Single Prints the current scene as a still image.
Sequence
Prints a series of scenes, a certain interval apart, on a
single sheet of paper. You can also print the folder number,
le number, and elapsed time for the frame by setting
[Caption] to [On].
188
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
●Specifying [Index] will prevent you from choosing [On] for both
[Date] and [File No.] at the same time.
●Index printing is not available on some Canon-brand PictBridge-
compatible printers (sold separately).
●The date is printed in a format matching setting details in [Date/
Time] on the [ 2] tab (=
21).
Setting Up Printing for Individual Images
Still Images Movies
1 Choose [Select Images & Qty.].
zPress the [ ] button, choose [Print
settings] on the [ 4] tab, and then press
the [ ] button.
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Select Images & Qty.],
and then press the [ ] button (=
30).
2 Choose an image.
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button.
zYou can now specify the number of
copies.
zIf you specify index printing for the
image, it is labeled with a [ ] icon. To
cancel index printing for the image, press
the [ ] button again. [ ] is no longer
displayed.
Conguring Print Settings
Still Images Movies
Specify the printing format, whether to add the date or le number, and
other settings as follows. These settings apply to all images in the print
list.
zPress the [ ] button, choose [Print
settings] on the [ 4] tab, and then press
the [ ] button.
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Print Settings], and then
press the [ ] button. On the next screen,
choose and congure items as needed
(=
30).
Print Type
Standard One image is printed per sheet.
Index Smaller versions of multiple images are
printed per sheet.
Both Both standard and index formats are
printed.
Date On Images are printed with the shooting date.
Off –
File No. On Images are printed with the le number.
Off –
Clear
DPOF data
On All image print list settings are cleared
after printing.
Off –
●Not all of your DPOF settings may be applied in printing by the
printer or photo development service, in some cases.
●[] may be displayed on the camera to warn you that the
memory card has print settings that were congured on another
camera. Changing the print settings using this camera may
overwrite all previous settings.
189
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Clearing All Images from the Print List
zFollowing step 1 in “Setting Up Printing
for Individual Images” (=
188), choose
[Clear All Selections] and press the [ ]
button.
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
Printing Images Added to the Print List (DPOF)
Still Images Movies
zWhen images have been added to the
print list (=
187 – =
189), this screen
is displayed after you connect the camera
to a PictBridge-compatible printer. Press
the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Print now],
and then simply press the [ ] button to
print the images in the print list.
zAny DPOF print job that you temporarily
stop will be resumed from the next image.
3 Specify the number of prints.
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to specify the number of prints (up
to 99).
zTo set up printing for other images and
specify the number of prints, repeat steps
2 – 3.
zPrinting quantity cannot be specied for
index prints. You can only choose which
images to print, by following step 2.
zWhen nished, press the [ ] button
to return to the menu screen.
Setting Up Printing for a Range of Images
Still Images Movies
zFollowing step 1 in “Setting Up Printing
for Individual Images” (=
188), choose
[Select Range] and press the [ ] button.
zFollow steps 2 – 3 in “Selecting a Range”
(=
122) to specify images.
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Order], and then press the [ ] button.
Setting Up Printing for All Images
Still Images Movies
zFollowing step 1 in “Setting Up Printing
for Individual Images” (=
188), choose
[Select All Images] and press the [ ]
button.
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
190
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
2 Choose an image.
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button.
z[] is displayed.
zTo remove the image from the photobook,
press the [ ] button again. [ ] is no
longer displayed.
zRepeat this process to specify other
images.
zWhen nished, press the [ ] button
to return to the menu screen.
Adding All Images to a Photobook
Still Images Movies
zFollowing the procedure in “Choosing
a Selection Method” (=
190), choose
[Select All Images] and press the [ ]
button.
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
Removing All Images from a Photobook
Still Images Movies
zFollowing the procedure in “Choosing
a Selection Method” (=
190), choose
[Clear All Selections] and press the [ ]
button.
zPress the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
Adding Images to a Photobook
Still Images Movies
Photobooks can be set up on the camera by choosing up to 998 images
on a memory card and using CameraWindow to import them to your
computer (=
182), where they are copied to their own folder. This
is convenient when ordering printed photobooks online or printing
photobooks with your own printer.
Choosing a Selection Method
zPress the [ ] button, choose
[Photobook Set-up] on the [ 4] tab, and
then choose how you will select images.
●[ ] may be displayed on the camera to warn you that the
memory card has print settings that were congured on another
camera. Changing the print settings using this camera may
overwrite all previous settings.
Adding Images Individually
Still Images Movies
1 Choose [Select].
zFollowing the procedure in “Choosing
a Selection Method” (=
190), choose
[Select] and press the [ ] button.
191
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Troubleshooting
If you think there is a problem with the camera, rst check the following.
If the items below do not solve your problem, contact a Canon Customer
Support Help Desk.
Power
Nothing happens when the power button is pressed.
●Conrm that the battery pack is charged (=
18).
●Conrm that the battery pack is inserted facing the correct way (=
19).
●Conrm that the memory card/battery cover is fully closed (=
19).
●Dirty battery terminals reduce battery performance. Try cleaning the terminals
with a cotton swab and reinserting the battery pack a few times.
The battery pack runs out of power quickly.
●Battery performance decreases at low temperatures. Try warming the battery
pack a little by putting it in your pocket, for example, ensuring that the terminals
do not touch any metal objects.
●Dirty battery terminals reduce battery performance. Try cleaning the terminals
with a cotton swab and reinserting the battery pack a few times.
●If these measures do not help and the battery pack still runs out of power soon
after charging, it has reached the end of its life. Purchase a new battery pack.
The lens is not retracted.
●Do not open the memory card/battery cover while the camera is on. Close the
cover, turn the camera on, and then turn it off again (=
19).
The battery pack is swollen.
●Battery swelling is normal and does not pose any safety concerns. However, if
battery swelling prevents the battery pack from tting in the camera, contact a
Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
Display on a TV
Camera images look distorted or are not displayed on a TV (=
179).
Appendix
Helpful information when using the camera
192
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
No AF frames are displayed and the camera does not focus when the
shutter button is pressed halfway.
●
To have AF frames displayed and the camera focus correctly, try composing the
shot with higher-contrast subject areas centered before you press the shutter
button halfway. Otherwise, try pressing the shutter button halfway repeatedly.
Subjects in shots look too dark.
●Raise the ash and set the ash mode to [ ] (=
95).
●Adjust brightness by using exposure compensation (=
78).
●Adjust brightness by using the Auto Lighting Optimizer (=
81).
●Use AE lock or spot metering (=
78, =
79).
Subjects look too bright, highlights are washed-out.
●Lower the ash and set the ash mode to [ ] (=
34).
●Adjust brightness by using exposure compensation (=
78).
●Use AE lock or spot metering (=
78, =
79).
●Reduce the lighting on subjects.
Shots look too dark despite the ash ring (=
37).
●Shoot within ash range (=
217).
●Adjust brightness by using ash exposure compensation or changing the ash
output level (=
96, =
103).
●Increase the ISO speed (=
80).
Subjects in ash shots look too bright, highlights are washed-out.
●Shoot within ash range (=
217).
●Lower the ash and set the ash mode to [ ] (=
34).
●Adjust brightness by using ash exposure compensation or changing the ash
output level (=
96, =
103).
White spots appear in ash shots.
●This is caused by light from the ash reecting off dust or airborne particles.
Shots look grainy.
●Lower the ISO speed (=
80).
●High ISO speeds in some shooting modes may cause grainy images (=
55).
Subjects are affected by red-eye.
●Set [Red-Eye Lamp] to [On] (=
54). The red-eye reduction lamp (=
4)
will light up for ash shots. For best results, have subjects look at the red-eye
reduction lamp. Also try increasing the lighting in indoor scenes and shooting at
closer range.
●Edit images using red-eye correction (=
131).
Shooting
Cannot shoot.
●In Playback mode (=
110), press the shutter button halfway (=
27).
Strange display on the screen under low light (=
29).
Strange display on the screen when shooting.
●Note that the following display problems are not recorded in still images but are
recorded in movies.
- The screen may icker and horizontal banding may appear under uorescent
or LED lighting.
Full-screen display is not available while shooting (=
97).
[] ashes on the screen when the shutter button is pressed, and shooting
is not possible (=
37).
[] is displayed when the shutter button is pressed halfway (=
37).
●Set [IS Mode] to [Continuous] (=
52).
●Raise the ash and set the ash mode to [ ] (=
95).
●Increase the ISO speed (=
80).
●Mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it still. Additionally,
you should set [IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod or other means to secure
the camera (=
52).
Shots are out of focus.
●Press the shutter button halfway to focus on subjects before pressing it all the
way down to shoot (=
27).
●Make sure subjects are within focusing range (=
219).
●Set [AF-assist Beam] to [On] (=
53).
●Conrm that unneeded functions such as macro are deactivated.
●Try shooting with focus lock or AF lock (=
90, =
94).
Shots are blurry.
●Blurring may occur more often when Touch Shutter is used to shoot, depending
on shooting conditions. Hold the camera still when shooting.
193
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Linear noise is recorded.
●Linear noise may be recorded if lights or other sources of bright light are visible
on the shooting screen in an otherwise dark scene. Recompose the shot so that
the bright light source is not visible on the shooting screen or nearby.
Playback
Playback is not possible.
●Image or movie playback may not be possible if a computer is used to rename
les or alter the folder structure.
Playback stops, or audio skips.
●Switch to a memory card that you have performed low-level formatting on with the
camera (=
169).
●There may be brief interruptions when playing movies copied to memory cards
that have slow read speeds.
●When movies are played on a computer, frames may be dropped and audio may
skip if computer performance is inadequate.
Sound is not played during movies.
●Adjust the volume (=
24) if you have activated [Mute] (=
173) or the sound
in the movie is faint.
●No sound is played for movies shot in [ ] (=
62), [ ] (=
68, =
74), or
[] (=
74) mode because audio is not recorded in these modes.
Cannot access the Story Highlights home screen by pressing the [ ]
button.
●Home screen display is not possible when connected to a printer. Disconnect the
camera from the printer.
●Home screen display is not possible during Wi-Fi connections. End the Wi-Fi
connection.
A desired subject icon for an album is not displayed on the Story
Highlights home screen.
●In simple information display mode (=
112), choose an image that shows the
name of the person for the album before accessing the Story Highlights home
screen (=
136).
Memory Card
The memory card is not recognized.
●Restart the camera, with the memory card in it (=
26).
Recording to the memory card takes too long, or continuous shooting is
slower.
●Use the camera to perform low-level formatting of the memory card (=
169).
Shooting settings or Quick Set menu settings are not available.
●Available setting items vary by shooting mode. Refer to “Functions Available
in Each Shooting Mode”, “Quick Set Menu”, and “Shooting Tab” (=
200 –
=
206).
The Babies or Children icon is not displayed.
●The Babies and Children icons will not be displayed if the birthday is not set in
face information (=
45). If the icons still are not displayed even when you set
the birthday, re-register face information (=
45), or make sure that the date/
time is set correctly (=
172).
Touch AF or Touch Shutter does not work.
●Touch AF or Touch Shutter will not work if you touch the edges of the screen.
Touch closer to the center of the screen.
Shooting Movies
The elapsed time shown is incorrect, or recording is interrupted.
●Use the camera to format the memory card, or switch to a card that supports
high-speed recording. Note that even if the elapsed time display is incorrect, the
length of movies on the memory card corresponds to the actual recording time
(=
169, =
220).
[ ] is displayed and shooting stops automatically.
●The camera’s internal memory buffer lled up as the camera could not record to
the memory card quickly enough. Try one of the following measures.
- Use the camera to perform low-level formatting of the memory card (=
169).
- Lower the image quality (=
50).
- Switch to a memory card that supports high-speed recording (=
220).
Zooming is not possible.
●Zooming is not possible in [ ] mode (=
65).
●Zooming is not possible when shooting movies in [ ] (=
62) and [ ]
(=
74) modes.
Subjects look distorted.
●Subjects that pass in front of the camera quickly may look distorted. This is not a
malfunction.
194
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Cannot send images.
●The destination device has insufcient storage space. Increase the storage space
on the destination device and resend the images.
●The write-protect switch of the memory card in the destination camera is set to
the locked position. Slide the write-protect switch to the unlocked position.
●RAW images cannot be sent. For images captured in both JPEG and RAW
format, only the JPEG version is sent. However, RAW images can be sent using
Image Sync.
●Images are not sent to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY or other Web services if you
move or rename image les or folders on the computer that received images sent
using Image Sync via an access point (=
162). Before moving or renaming
these image les or folders on the computer, make sure the images have already
been sent to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY or other Web services.
Cannot resize images for sending.
●Images cannot be resized to be bigger than the recording pixel setting of their
original size.
●Movies cannot be resized.
Images take a long time to send./The wireless connection is disrupted.
●Multiple images may take a long time to send. Try resizing the image to reduce
sending time (=
161).
●Movies may take a long time to send.
●Do not use the camera near sources of Wi-Fi signal interference, such as
microwave ovens, Bluetooth devices, or other equipment operating on the
2.4 GHz band. Note that images may take a long time to send even when [ ]
is displayed.
●Bring the camera closer to the other device you are trying to connect to (such as
the access point), and make sure there are no objects between the devices.
No notication message is received on a computer or smartphone after
adding CANON iMAGE GATEWAY to the camera.
●Make sure the email address you entered is correct, and try adding the
destination again.
●Check the email settings on the computer or smartphone. If they are congured to
block email from certain domains, you may not be able to receive the notication
message.
Want to erase Wi-Fi connection information before disposing of the
camera or giving it to someone else.
●Reset the Wi-Fi settings (=
167).
Computer
Cannot transfer images to a computer.
●When attempting to transfer images to the computer via a cable, try reducing the
transfer speed as follows.
-Press the [ ] button to enter Playback mode. Hold the [ ] button
down as you press the [ ] and [ ] buttons at the same time. On the next
screen, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [B], and then press the [ ] button.
Wi-Fi
Cannot access the Wi-Fi menu by pressing the [ ] button.
●The Wi-Fi menu cannot be accessed while the camera is connected to a printer
or computer via a cable. Disconnect the cable.
Cannot add a device/destination.
●A total of 20 items of connection information can be added to the camera. Erase
unneeded connection information from the camera rst, and then add new
devices/destinations (=
165).
●Use a computer or smartphone to register Web services (=
153).
●To add a smartphone, rst install the dedicated application Camera Connect on
your smartphone (=
142).
●To add a computer, rst install the software CameraWindow on your computer.
Also check your computer and Wi-Fi environment and settings (=
147,
=
149).
●Do not use the camera near sources of Wi-Fi signal interference, such as
microwave ovens, Bluetooth devices, or other equipment operating on the
2.4 GHz band.
●Bring the camera closer to the other device you are trying to connect to (such as
the access point), and make sure there are no objects between the devices.
Cannot connect to the access point.
●Conrm that the access point channel is set to a channel supported by the
camera (=
217). Note that instead of auto channel assignment, it is advisable to
specify a supported channel manually.
195
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Unidentied Image/Incompatible JPEG/Image too large./Cannot play back
MOV/Cannot play back MP4
●Unsupported or corrupt images cannot be displayed.
●It may not be possible to display images that were edited or renamed on a
computer, or images shot with another camera.
Cannot magnify!/Cannot rotate/Cannot modify image/Cannot modify/
Cannot assign to category/Unselectable image./No identication
information
●The following functions may be unavailable for images that were renamed or
already edited on a computer, or images shot with another camera. Note that
starred (*) functions are not available for movies.
Edit ID Info (=
118)*, Magnify (=
119)*, Rotate (=
125)*, Favorites (=
126),
Edit (=
128)*, Print List (=
187)*, and Photobook Set-up (=
190)*.
Invalid selection range
●When specifying a range for image selection (=
122, =
125, =
189), you
attempted to choose an initial image that was after the nal image, or vice-versa.
Exceeded selection limit
●More than 998 images were selected for Print List (=
187) or Photobook Set-up
(=
190). Choose 998 images or less.
●Print List (=
187) or Photobook Set-up (=
190) settings could not be saved
correctly. Reduce the number of selected images and try again.
●You attempted to choose more than 500 images in Protect (=
121), Erase
(=
123), Favorites (=
126), Print List (=
187), or Photobook Set-up
(=
190).
Naming error!
●The folder could not be created or images could not be recorded, because the
highest supported folder number (999) for storing images on the card has been
reached and the highest supported image number (9999) for images in folders
has been reached. On the [ 1] tab, change [File Numbering] to [Auto Reset]
(=
168), or format the memory card (=
169).
Lens Error
●This error may occur if the lens is held while it is moving, or when the camera is
used in dusty or sandy locations.
●Frequent display of this error message may indicate camera damage. In this
case, contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
On-Screen Messages
If an error message is displayed, respond as follows.
Shooting or Playback
No memory card
●The memory card may be inserted facing the wrong way. Reinsert the memory
card facing the correct way (=
19).
Memory card locked
●The write-protect switch of the memory card is set to the locked position. Switch
the write-protect switch to the unlocked position (=
19).
Cannot record!
●Shooting was attempted without a memory card in the camera. To shoot, insert a
memory card facing the correct way (=
19).
Memory card error (=
169)
●If the same error message is displayed even after you have formatted a
supported memory card (=
2) and have inserted it facing the correct way
(=
19), contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
Insufcient space on card
●There is not enough free space on the memory card to shoot (=
34, =
55,
=
77, =
100) or edit images (=
128). Either erase unneeded images
(=
123) or insert a memory card with enough free space (=
19).
Touch AF unavailable
●Touch AF is not available in the current shooting mode (=
200).
Touch AF canceled
●The subject selected for Touch AF can no longer be detected (=
93).
Charge the battery (=
18)
No Image.
●The memory card does not contain any images that can be displayed.
Protected! (=
121)
196
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Disconnected/Receiving failed/Sending failed
●You may be in an environment where Wi-Fi signals are obstructed.
●Avoid using the camera’s Wi-Fi function around microwave ovens, Bluetooth
devices, and other devices that operate on the 2.4 GHz band.
●Bring the camera closer to the other device you are trying to connect to (such as
the access point), and make sure there are no objects between the devices.
●Check the connected device to make sure it is not experiencing errors.
Sending failed
Memory card error
●If the same error message is displayed even when you have inserted a formatted
memory card facing the correct way, contact a Canon Customer Support Help
Desk.
Receiving failed
Insufcient space on card
●There is not enough free space on the memory card in the target camera to
receive images. Erase images to create space on the memory card, or insert a
memory card with sufcient space.
Receiving failed
Memory card locked
●The write-protect switch of the memory card in the camera to receive the images
is set to the locked position. Slide the write-protect switch to the unlocked
position.
Receiving failed
Naming error!
●When the highest folder number (999), and the highest image number (9999)
have been reached on the receiving camera, images cannot be received.
Insufcient space on server
●Delete unnecessary images uploaded to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY to create
space.
●Save the images sent via Image Sync (=
162) to your computer.
Check network settings
●
Check to make sure your computer can connect to the Internet with the current
network settings.
A camera error was detected (error number)
●If this error message is displayed immediately after a shot, the image may not
have been saved. Switch to Playback mode to check for the image.
●Frequent display of this error message may indicate camera damage. In this
case, write down the error number (Exx) and contact a Canon Customer Support
Help Desk.
File Error
●Correct printing (=
184) may not be possible for photos from other cameras or
images that have been altered using computer software, even if the camera is
connected to the printer.
Print error
●Check the paper size setting (=
186). If this error message is displayed when
the setting is correct, restart the printer and complete the setting on the camera
again.
Ink absorber full
●
Contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk to request assistance with ink
absorber replacement.
Wi-Fi
Connection failed
●No access points were recognized. Check the access point settings (=
149).
●
A device could not be found. Turn the camera off and on again, and retry the
connection.
●Check the device you want to connect to and make sure it is ready for connection.
Cannot determine access point
●The WPS buttons on numerous access points were pressed simultaneously. Try
reconnecting again.
No access points found
●Check to make sure that the access point is turned on.
●When connecting to an access point manually, make sure that you entered the
correct SSID.
Incorrect password/Incorrect Wi-Fi security settings
●Check the access point security settings (=
149).
IP address conict
●Reset the IP address so that it does not conict with another.
197
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
(21) Remaining time (=
220)
(22) Histogram (=
113)
(23) Quick Set menu (=
29)
(24) Focus range (=
87, =
87),
AF lock (=
94)
(25) AF frame (=
89), Spot AE point
frame (=
79)
(26) Grid lines (=
106)
(27) AE lock (=
78), FE lock
(=
96)
(28) Shutter speed (=
100, =
101)
(29) Aperture value (=
101)
(30) Electronic level (=
51)
(31) Exposure level (=
101)
(32) ISO speed (=
80)
(33) Zoom bar (=
34)
(34) Hybrid Auto mode (=
36)
(35) Camera shake warning (=
37)
(36) Wind filter (=
73)
(37) Time zone (=
172)
(38) Image stabilization (=
52)
(39) Auto Level (=
52)
(40) Auto slow shutter (=
73)
(41) Attenuator (=
74)
(42) Expo. simulation (=
78)
(43) MF indicator (=
87)
(44) Exposure compensation (=
78)
Battery Level
An on-screen icon or message indicates the battery charge level.
Display Details
Sufcient charge
Slightly depleted, but sufcient
(Blinking red) Nearly depleted. Charge the battery
pack soon.
[Charge the battery] Depleted. Charge the battery pack
immediately.
On-Screen Information
Shooting (Information Display)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(6)
(8)
(
12
)
(
10
)
(
14
)(
15
)(
16
) (
17
) (
18
)(
19
) (
21
)(
20
) (
22
)
(
23
)
(
24
)
(
25
)
(
26
)
(
43
)
(
44
)
(
28
)
(
34
)
(
35
)
(
29
) (
31
)(
30
) (
32
)
(
36
)(
37
)
(
33
)
(
27
)
(9)
(
11
)
(
13
)
(5)
(7)(
38
) (
39
)
(
40
)(
41
) (
42
)
(1) Shooting mode (=
200), Scene
icon (=
38)
(2) Flash mode (=
95)
(3) Flash exposure compensation /
Flash output level (=
96,
=
103)
(4) Metering method (=
79)
(5) High ISO speed NR (=
80)
(6) ND Filter (=
81)
(7) Eco mode (=
171)
(8) Drive Mode (=
44), AEB
shooting (=
81), Focus
bracketing (=
88)
(9) Picture Style (=
84)
(10) White balance (=
82)
(11) Auto Lighting Optimizer (=
81)
(12) Touch Shutter (=
44)
(13) Self-timer (=
42)
(14) IS mode icon (=
40)
(15) Battery level (=
197)
(16) Still image compression (=
97),
Recording pixel setting (=
97)
(17) Recordable shots (=
220)
(18) Maximum continuous shots
(19) Movie quality (=
50)
(20) Zoom magnification (=
41),
Digital tele-converter (=
89)
198
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
(28) Image quality / Frame rate
(movies) (=
50), Group
playback (=
117)
(29) Compression (image quality)
(=
97) / Recording pixels
(=
50), Digest movies
(=
36), RAW (=
98), MP4
(movies), Albums (=
136)
(30) Still images: Recording pixel
setting (=
220)
Movies: Playback time (=
220)
(31) File size
●Some information may not be displayed when viewing images on
a TV (=
179).
Playback (Detailed Information Display)
(1) (3)(2)
(4) (5) (6)(7) (8)(9)(
10
)(
11
) (
12
) (
13
)
(
14
) (
15
) (
16
) (
17
) (
18
) (
19
)
(
24
) (
26
) (
28
) (
29
)
(
25
) (
27
)
(
30
) (
31
)
(
20
) (
21
) (
22
) (
23
)
(1) Movies (=
34, =
110)
(2) Digest movies (=
114)
(3) Group playback (=
117)
(4) Current image no. / Total no. of
images
(5) Histogram (=
113)
(6) Battery level (=
197)
(7) Wi-Fi signal strength (=
161)
(8) Image Sync (=
162)
(9) Image editing (=
128), Movie
compression (=
135)
(10) Favorites (=
126)
(11) Protection (=
121)
(12) Folder number - File number
(=
168)
(13) Shooting date/time (=
20)
(14) Shooting mode (=
200)
(15) Shutter speed (=
100, =
101)
(16) Aperture value (=
101, =
101)
(17) Exposure compensation level
(=
78)
(18) ISO speed (=
80)
(19) Highlight tone priority (=
82)
(20) White balance (=
82)
(21) White balance correction
(=
83), Picture Style setting
details (=
84)
(22) Flash (=
95), Flash exposure
compensation (=
96)
(23) Metering method (=
79)
(24) Auto Lighting Optimizer (=
81)
(25) ND filter (=
81), Short clip
playback effect (=
74)
(26) High ISO speed NR (=
80)
(27) Focus range (=
87, =
87),
Red-eye correction (=
131)
199
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Summary of Movie Control Panel
The following operations are available on the movie control panel,
accessed as described in “Viewing” (=
110).
Touch to display the volume panel, and then touch [ ][ ] to
adjust the volume. At a volume of 0, [ ] is displayed.
Play
Slow Motion (To adjust the playback speed, press the [ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial. No sound is played.)
Skip Backward* or Previous Clip (=
135) (To continue skipping
backward, keep holding down the [ ] button.)
Previous Frame (For fast-rewind, keep holding down the [ ]
button.)
Next Frame (For fast-forward, keep holding down the [ ] button.)
Skip Forward* or Next Clip (=
135) (To continue skipping
forward, keep holding down the [ ] button.)
Erase Clip (displayed when a digest movie is selected, =
135)
Edit (=
134)
Shown when the camera is connected to a PictBridge-compatible
printer (=
184).
* Displays the frame approx. 4 sec. before or after the current frame.
●During movie playback, you can skip back or forward (or to the
previous or next clip) by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons.
200
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Functions and Menu Tables
Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode
Shooting Mode
Function
Exposure Compensation (=
78) *1
O O O O
– –
OOOOOOOOOOOOO O OOOOOOOOOO
ISO Speed
(=
80)
AUTO *1
O O O O O O OOOOOOOOOOOOO O OOOOOOOOOO
ISO 125 – 12800
*1
O O O O
– – ––––––––––––– – –––––––
O
– –
Drive Mode
(=
44)
*1
O O O O O O OOOOOOOOOOOOO O OOOOOOOOOO
– – – – – –
O
––––––––––––– – ––––––––––
*1
O O O O
–
O
–
O
––––––––––– – –––
O
–
OOO
–
O
*1
O O O O
–
O
–
O O
–––––––––– – –––
O
–
OOO
–
O
Flash ring
(=
95)
*1 – – –
O O O
–
O
–––––
O
–
OOOO O
–
OOO
––––––
*1
O O O O
– –
O O
–
O
–––
O
–
OOOO O
–
OOO
––––––
*1 –
O
–
O
*2 *2 –––––––*2 ––––– – ––––––––––
*1
O O O O O O O O O
–
OOOOOOOOO O OOOOOOOOOO
Flash Exposure
Compensation
(=
96)
±0 *1
O O O O O O O O
–
O
–––
O
–
OOOO O
–
OOO
––––––
–
±2 *1
O O O O
– –
O
– –
O
––––––––– – ––––––––––
Flash Output
Level (=
103)
Minimum/Medium/Maximum
*1
O O O
– – – ––––––––––––– – ––––––––––
O Available or set automatically. – Not available.
201
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Shooting Mode
Function
Av/Tv Settings
(=
100,
=
101)
Aperture Value *1
O O
– – – – ––––––––––––– – –––––––
O
– –
Shutter Speed *1
O
–
O
– – – ––––––––––––– – –––––––
O
– –
BULB *1
O
– – – – – ––––––––––––– – ––––––––––
Program Shift (=
78) *1 *3 *3 *3
O
– – ––––––––––––– – ––––––––––
AE Lock/FE Lock in Standby*4 (=
78,
=
96) *1
O O O O
– – ––––––––––––– – –––––
OOO
–
O
AE Lock (during recording), Exposure
Compensation (=
72, =
78) *1
O O O O
– – –
OOOOO
–
OOOOOO O OOOOOO
–
O
–
O
AF Lock (when assigned to the Ring function
selector) (=
106) *1
O O O O
– – –
OOOOOOOOOOOO O OOOO
–
OOOOO
AF Lock (when assigned to the movie button)
(=
106) *1
O O O O
– – –
OOOOO
–
OOOOOO O OOOO
––––––
AF Lock by touch during recording (=
94) *1
O O O O
– – –
O O
––––
O O
–
O O
– – – –
O O
–
O
–
O
– –
Optical Zoom *1
O O O O O O O O O
––––
OOOOOO O OOOOOOOOOO
Focus Range
(=
87,
=
87)
*1
O O O O O O OOOOOOOOOOOOO O OOOOOOOOOO
*1
O O O O
– – –
O O
––––
OOOOOO O OOO
– –
OOOOO
/ –– – – – – – ––––––––––––– – –––
O
––––––
*1
O O O O
– – –
O O
–
OOOOOOOOO O
–
OOO
–
OOOOO
O Available or set automatically. – Not available.
202
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Shooting Mode
Function
Manual Focus Switching When Recording
Movies (=
72) *1
O O O O
– – –
O O
–
O O
–
OOOOO
–
O
–
OOO
–
OOO
–
O
Move the AF
Frame (=
90)
Center *1
O O O O
– – –
OOOOOOOO
–
O O
–
O
–
OOO
–
OOOOO
Periphery *1
O O O O
– – –
OOO
*5 *5 *5
O O
–
O O
– – – –
O O
–
OOOO
–
Touch AF (=
93) *1
O O O O O O O O O O
*5 *5 *5
O O
–
O O
– – – –
O O
–
OOOO
–
Face Select (=
93) *1
O O O O O O O O O
––––
O O
–
O O
–
O O O O
– –
OOO
–
O
Touch Shutter (=
44) *1
O O O O O O O O O
––––
O O
*6
O O
–
O OOOO
*6 –––––
Change Shooting Information Display (=
29) *1
O O O O O O OOOOOOOOOOOO
–
O OOOOOO
–
OOO
*1 Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode.
*2 Not available, but switches to [ ] in some cases.
*3 To maintain the optimum exposure, ISO speed in addition to the aperture value or shutter speed
may be automatically changed.
*4 FE lock not available in [ ] ash mode.
*5 Only when [ ] is selected.
*6 Only available for shooting. Subject designation not available.
O Available or set automatically. – Not available.
203
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Quick Set Menu
Shooting Mode
Function
AF method
(=
89)
+Tracking *1
O O O O O O O O O O
–––
O O
–
O O
–
O O O O
– –
OOO
–
O
AF *1
O O O O
– – –
OOOOOOOOOOOO O
–
OOOOOOOOO
AF operation
(=
91)
*1
OO OOO
*2
OOOOOOOOOOOOO O OOOOOOOOOO
*1
O O O O
– – – –
O
–––––
O
–
O O
–
O
– –
O O
––––––
Image quality (=
97) See “Shooting Tab” (=
206).
Movie rec. size
(=
50)
When Set
to NTSC
*1
O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
OOOOO
–
O OOOOOO
–
O
– –
*1
O O O O O O OOOOOOOOOOOO
–
O OOOOOO
–
OOO
*1
O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
OOOOO
–
O OOOOOO
–
O
– –
*1
O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
OOOOO
*3
O OOOOOOOO
– –
*1
O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
OOOOO
*3
O OOOOOO
–
O
– –
When Set
to PAL
*1
O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
OOOOO
–
O OOOOOO
–
O
– –
*1
O O O O O O OOOOOOOOOOOO
–
O OOOOOO
–
OOO
*1
O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
OOOOO
*3
O OOOOOOOO
– –
*1
O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
OOOOO
*3
O OOOOOO
–
O
– –
O Available or set automatically. – Not available.
204
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Shooting Mode
Function
Still Image
Aspect Ratio
(=
49)
*1
O O O O
–
O
–
OOOOOO
–––––
O
– – –
OOO
*4
O
*4
O O
*1
O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
OOOOO
–
O OOOOO
–––––
*1
O O O O
–
O
–
OOOOO
––––––
O
– – –
OOO
*4 –*4 – –
*1
O O O O
–
O OOOOOO
––––––– – ––
OOO
–––––
Self-Timer
(=
42) / / / *1
O O O O O O OOOOOOOOOOOOO O OOOOOOOOOO
Self-Timer
Settings
Custom
Timer
Delay*5*1
O O O O O O OOOOOOOOOOOOO O OOOOOOOOOO
Shots*6*1
O O O O
–
O
–
O O
––––
OOOOOO O OOOOO
–––––
ND Filter
(=
81)
*1
O O O O O O
–––
OOOOO
–
OOO
–
O
– –
OOOOOOOO
*1
O O O O
– –
OOO
–––––
O
–––
O
–
O O
––––––––
*1
O O O O
– – ––––––––––––– – –––––
OOOOO
White balance
(=
82)
*1
O O O O O O OOOOOOOOOOOOO O OOOOOOOOOO
/ / / / /
/ *1
O O O O
– – ––––––––––––– – –––––
OOOOO
*1
O O O O
– – ––––––––––––– – –––
O
–
OOOOO
*1
O O O O
– – ––––––––––––– – ––––––––––
WB Correction (=
83) *1
O O O O
– – ––––––––––––– – –––––
OOOOO
WB Correction (Underwater) (=
57) –– – – – – – ––––––––––––– – –––
O
––––––
Color Adjustment (Biaxial) (=
70) – – – – – – – – – –
OOOO
–––––– – ––––––––––
Set color temp. (=
84) *1
O O O O
– – ––––––––––––– – –––––
OOOOO
O Available or set automatically. – Not available.
205
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Shooting Mode
Function
Picture Style
(=
84)
*1
O O O O O O
–
O O
–––––––––– – –––––
OOOO
–
*1
O O O O
– –
O
– –
OOOOOOOOOO O OOOOOOOOOO
/ / /
/ / / /
/
*1
O O O O
– – ––––––––––––– – –––––
OOOO
–
Metering mode
(=
79)
*1
O O O O O O OOOOOOOOOOOOO O OOOOOOOOOO
/*1
O O O O
– – ––––––––––––– – ––––––––––
Auto Lighting
Optimizer
(=
81)
*1
O O O O
– –
O
– –
OOOOOOOOOO O OOO
–
OOOOOO
/*1
O O O O
– – ––––––––––––– – –––––
O
–
O
–
O
*1
O O O O O O
–
O O
–––––––––– – –––
O
–
OOO
–
O
*1 Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode.
*2 [SERVO] when subject movement is detected.
*3 Synchronizes with the aspect ratio setting and is automatically set (=
49).
*4 Set automatically to suit the aspect ratio of the movie recording size.
*5 Cannot be set to 0 seconds in modes without selection of the number of shots.
*6 One shot (cannot be modied) in modes without selection of the number of shots.
O Available or set automatically. – Not available.
206
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Shooting Tab
Shooting Mode
Function
1
Rec. Mode (=
55, =
58, =
72) – – – – – – –
OOOOOOOOOOOOO O OOOOOOOOOO
Image
quality
(=
50,
=
97)
JPEG
*1
O O O O
–
O
–
O
––––––––––– – –––
OOOOOOO
*1
O O O O O O OOOOOOOOOOOOO O OOOOOOOOOO
/ /
/ / / *1
O O O O
–
O O O O
––––
OOOOOO O OOOOOOOOOO
RAW
– *1
O O O O O O OOOOOOOOOOOOO O OOOOOOOOOO
*1
O O O O
–
O
–
O
––––––––––– – –––
OOOOOOO
Still Image Aspect Ratio (=
49) See “Quick Set Menu” (=
203).
Shooting
information
display
(
=
106)
Screen
info/ toggle
settings
Shooting Info/
Histogram/
Grid display/
Electronic
Level
*1
O O O O O O OOOOOOOOOOOOO O OOOOOOOOOO
Grid display
Grid 1 (9 divi-
sions)/Grid 2
(24 divisions)
*1
O O O O O O OOOOOOOOOOOOO O OOOOOOOOOO
Expo. simulation
(=
78)
Disable *1
O O O O
– – ––––––––––––– – ––––––––––
Enable *1
O O O O O O OOOOOOOOOOOOO O OOOOOOOOOO
Reverse Display
(=
28)
On *1
O O O O O O OOOOOOOOOOOOO O OOOOOOOOOO
Off *1
O O O O O O
–
OOOOOOOOOOOO O OOOOOOOOOO
Image review (=
54)
Off/Hold *1
O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
OOOOOO O OOOOOOOOOO
2 sec./4 sec./
8 sec. *1
O O O O O O OOOOOOOOOOOOO O OOOOOOOOOO
O Available or set automatically. – Not available.
207
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Shooting Mode
Function
2
Touch Shutter
(=
44)
Enable *1
O O O O O O O O O
––––
OOOOO
–
O OOOOO
–––––
Disable *1
O O O O O O OOOOOOOOOOOOO O OOOOOOOOOO
Face ID Settings
(=
45) On/Off *1
O O O O O O OOOOOOOOOOOOO O OOOOOOOOOO
Set button (=
106) *1
O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
OOOOOO O OOOOO
–––––
Set button (=
106) *1
O O O O O O OOOOOOOOOOOOO O OOOOOOOOOO
Set function (=
104) *1
O O O O O O O O
––––––––––– – –––
O O
– –
O
– –
Quick setting menu layout (=
107) *1
O O O O O O OOOOOOOOOOOOO O OOOOOOOOOO
Save Settings (=
108) *1
O O O O
– – ––––––––––––– – ––––––––––
3*5
Digital Zoom (=
41)
Standard *1
O O O O O O
–
O O
–––––––––– – –––
OOO
–
OOO
Off *1
O O O O O O OOOOOOOOOOOOO O OOOOOOOOOO
1.6x/2.0x
*1
O O O O
– – ––––––––––––– – ––––––––––
AF operation (=
91) See “Quick Set Menu” (=
203).
AF method (=
89) See “Quick Set Menu” (=
203).
AF Frame Size*2
(=
90)
Normal *1
O O O O
– – –
O O
––––––
O
–––
O
–
OOO
–
OOOOO
Small *1
O O O O
– – –
O O
––––––––––
O
–
OOO
–
OOOOO
Continuous AF
(=
92)
On *1
O O O O O O O O O
––––
OOOOOO O OOOO
–
OOOOO
Off *1
O O O O
– –
OOOOOOOOOOOOO O OOOOO
–––––
O Available or set automatically. – Not available.
208
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Shooting Mode
Function
4*6
AF+MF (=
92) On/Off *1
O O O O
– – –
O O
–
OOOOOOOOO O
–
OOO
–
OOOOO
AF-assist Beam
(=
53)
On *1
O O O O O O O O O O
–––
OOOOOO O OOO
– –
OOOOO
Off *1
O O O O O O OOOOOOOOOOOOO O OOOOOOOOOO
MF-Point Zoom
(=
87)
Off *1
O O O O O O OOOOOOOOOOOOO O OOOOOOOOOO
5x/10x *1
O O O O
– – –
O
– –
OOO
–––––– – ––
O O
––––––
Safety MF (=
87)
On *1
O O O O
– – –
O
–––––
OOO
– –
O O
–
OOO
–
OOOOO
Off *1
O O O O O O OOOOOOOOOOOOO O OOOOOOOOOO
MF
Peaking
Settings
(=
88)
Peaking
On *1
O O O O
– – –
O O
–
OOOOOOOOO O
–
OOO
–
OOOOO
Off *1
O O O O O O OOOOOOOOOOOOO O OOOOOOOOOO
Level Low/High *1
O O O O
– – –
O O
–
OOOOOOOOO O
–
OOO
–
OOOOO
Color Red/Yellow/
Blue *1
O O O O
– – –
O O
–
OOOOOOOOO O
–
OOO
–
OOOOO
IS
Settings
(=
52)
IS Mode
Off *1
O O O O O O O O
–
OOOO
–
OOOOO O OOOOOOOOOO
Continuous *1
O O O O O O O O
–––––
OOOOOO O OOOOOOOO
–
O
Shoot Only *1
O O O O
– –
OOO
–––––
OOOOO O OOOOO
–––––
Dynamic IS
Low *1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
OOOOO O OOOOOOOOOO
Standard *1
O O O O O O O O O
––––
OOOOO
–
O OOOOOO
–
O
–
O
High –– – – – – – ––––––––––––– – –––––
O
–
O
–
O
Auto level (=
52)
Enable *1
O O O O O O O O O
––––
OOOOO
–
O OOOOOO
–
O
–
O
Disable *1
O O O O O O OOOOOOOOOOOOO O OOOOOOOOOO
O Available or set automatically. – Not available.
209
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Shooting Mode
Function
5*7
Bracketing (=
88)
BKT-Off *1
O O O O O O OOOOOOOOOOOOO O OOOOOOOOOO
AEB *1
O O O O
– – ––––––––––––– – ––––––––––
Focus-BKT
*1
O O O O
– – ––––––––––––– – ––––––––––
ISO speed (
=
80
)
ISO Speed See “Shooting Tab” (=
206).
ISO
Auto
Settings
Max ISO Speed *1
O O O O
– – ––––––––––––– – –––––––
O
– –
Rate of
Change
Standard *1
O O O O O O OOOOOOOOOOOOO O OOOOOOOOOO
Fast/Slow *1 –
O
–
O
– – ––––––––––––– – ––––––––––
Highlight tone priority
(=
82)
Disable *1
O O O O O O OOOOOOOOOOOOO O OOOOOOOOO
–
Enable *1
O O O O
– – ––––––––––––– – –––––
O
–
O
– –
Auto Lighting Optimizer (=
81) See “Quick Set Menu” (=
203).
Metering mode (=
79) See “Quick Set Menu” (=
203).
ND Filter (=
81) See “Quick Set Menu” (=
203).
O Available or set automatically. – Not available.
210
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Shooting Mode
Function
5*7
Flash
Settings
(=
54,
=
96,
=
97,
=
103)
Flash Mode
Auto *1
O O O O O O O O
–
O
–––
O
–
OOOO O
–
OOO
––––––
Manual *1
O O O
– – – ––––––––––––– – ––––––––––
Flash Exp. Comp See “Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode” (=
200).
Flash Output See “Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode” (=
200).
Shutter
Sync.
1st-curtain *1
O O O O O O O O
–
O
–––
O
–
OOOO O
–
OOO
––––––
2nd-curtain *1
O O O O
– – ––––––––––––– – ––––––––––
Red-Eye
Lamp
On *1
O O O O O O O O
–
O
–––
O
–
OOOO O
–
O O
–––––––
Off *1
O O O O O O O O
–
O
–––
O
–
OOOO O
–
OOO
––––––
Safety FE
On *1 –
O O O O O O O
–
O
–––
O
–
OOOO O
–
OOO
––––––
Off *1
O O O O
– – ––––––––––––– – ––––––––––
O Available or set automatically. – Not available.
211
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Shooting Mode
Function
6*8
White Balance (=
82) See “Quick Set Menu” (=
203).
Custom WB (=
83)
O O O O O
– – ––––––––––––– – –––
O
–
OOOO
–
WB Correction (=
83) See “Quick Set Menu” (=
203).
Picture Style (=
84) See “Quick Set Menu” (=
203).
High ISO speed NR
(=
80)
Standard *1
O O O O O O OOOOOOOOOOOOO O OOOOOOOOOO
Low/High *1
O O O O
– – ––––––––––––– – ––––––––––
Spot AE Point
(=
79)
Center/
AF Point *1
O O O O
– – ––––––––––––– – ––––––––––
Safety Shift (=
101)
On *1 –
O O
– – – ––––––––––––– – ––––––––––
Off *1
O O O O O O OOOOOOOOOOOOO O OOOOOOOOOO
Color Adjustment See “Quick Set Menu” (=
203).
O Available or set automatically. – Not available.
212
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Shooting Mode
Function
7*9
Self-Timer (=
42) See “Quick Set Menu” (=
203).
Star
Time-
Lapse
Movie
Setting
(=
68)
Save
Stills
Enable/
Disable – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O
–––––– – ––––––––––
Effect*3 / / /
/ – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O
–––––– – ––––––––––
Shot
Interval
15 sec./30 sec./
1 min.*
4
– – – – – – – – – – – – –
O
–––––– – ––––––––––
Frame Rate
NTSC: /
/
PAL: / – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O
–––––– – ––––––––––
Shooting
Time
60 min./90 min./
120 min./
Unlimited
– – – – – – – – – – – – –
O
–––––– – ––––––––––
Auto
exposure
Lock to 1st shot/
For each shot
– – – – – – – – – – – – –
O
–––––– – ––––––––––
O Available or set automatically. – Not available.
213
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Shooting Mode
Function
7*9
Star Emphasis
(=
66)
Sharp/Soft – – – – – – – – – –
O O
–––––––– – ––––––––––
Off *1
O O O O O O OOOOOOOOOOOOO O OOOOOOOOOO
Star
Portrait
Settings
(=
65)
Star Visibility
Standard *1
O O O O O O OOOOOOOOOOOOO O OOOOOOOOOO
Prominent – – – – – – – – – –
O
––––––––– – ––––––––––
Time-
lapse
movie
settings
(=
74)
Shooting
scene
Scene 1/
Scene 2/
Scene 3
–– – – – – – ––––––––––––– – ––––––––
O
–
Interval/
Shots
1 – 4 sec./
30 – 900 shots
(Scene 1)
5 – 10 sec./
30 – 720 shots
(Scene 2)
11 – 30 sec./
30 – 240 shots
(Scene 3)
–– – – – – – ––––––––––––– – ––––––––
O
–
Auto
exposure
Lock to 1st shot/
For each shot
–– – – – – – ––––––––––––– – ––––––––
O
–
Review
image
Enable/
Disable –– – – – – – ––––––––––––– – ––––––––
O
–
O Available or set automatically. – Not available.
214
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Shooting Mode
Function
8
Digest Type (=
36) Include Stills/
No Stills – – – – –
O
– ––––––––––––– – ––––––––––
Movie rec. size (=
50) See “Quick Set Menu” (=
203).
Wind Filter (=
73)
Auto *1
O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
OOOOO
–
O OOOOOO
–
O
–
O
Off *1
O O O O
– – ––––––
O
–––––
O
– –––––
OOOOO
Attenuator (=
74)
Auto *1
O O O O O O OOOOOOOOOOOOO O OOOOOOOOOO
Off/On *1
O O O O
– – ––––––––––––– – –––––
O
–
O
–
O
Auto slow shutter
(=
73)
Enable *1
O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
OOOOO
–
O OOOOOO
––––
Disable *1
O O O O O O OOOOOOOOOOOOO O OOOOOOOOOO
*1 Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode.
*2 Enabled when the AF frame is set to [1-point AF].
*3 Enabled when [Save Stills] is set to [Disable].
*4 Enabled when [Effect] is set to [Off].
*5 Items from the [ 4] tab are shown on the [ 3] tab in these modes: [ ], [ ],
and [ ].
*6 Items from the [ 6] tab are shown on the [ 4] tab in these modes: [ ], [ ],
and [ ].
*7 Items from the [ 7] tab are shown on the [ 5] tab in these modes: [ ], [ ],
[], [ ], [ ], [ ], and [ ]. Items from the [ 6] tab are shown on the [ 5]
tab in [ ] mode.
*8 Items from the [ 7] tab are shown on the [ 6] tab in these modes: [ ],
[], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], and [ ]. Items
from the [ 8] tab are shown on the [ 6] tab in these modes: [ ], [ ], [ ],
[], [ ], and [ ].
*9 Items from the [ 8] tab are shown on the [ 7] tab in these modes: [ ],
[], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], and [ ].
- When using Face ID (=
45) in some modes or with some settings, names of
people may be recorded in shots even when not displayed.
O Available or set automatically. – Not available.
215
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Set Up Tab
Tab Item Reference
Page
1
Create Folder =
168
File Numbering =
168
Format =
169
Video system =
170
Electronic Level =
51
Start-up Image =
170
2
Eco Mode =
171
Power Saving =
27
Disp. Brightness =
171
Night Display =
172
Time Zone =
172
Date/Time =
172
Lens Retraction =
173
Tab Item Reference
Page
3
Language =
173
Mute =
173
Volume =
173
Sound Options =
174
Hints & Tips =
174
Mode icon size/info =
174
4
Touch Operation =
174
Units =
175
Wireless settings =
141
Certication Logo Display =
175
Copyright Info =
175
Reset All =
176
My Menu Tab
Tab Item Reference
Page
1My Menu settings =
109
216
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Playback Tab
Tab Item Reference
Page
1
Protect =
121
Rotate =
125
Erase =
123
Favorites =
126
Slideshow =
120
2
Album Playback =
136
List/Play Digest Movies =
114
Short Clip Mix =
139
Image Search =
115
Creative lters =
130
3
Resize =
128
Cropping =
129
Red-Eye Correction =
131
Face ID Info =
114
RAW img processing =
132
4
Print settings =
188
Photobook Set-up =
190
Tab Item Reference
Page
5
Transition Effect =
110
Index Effect =
115
Scroll Display =
110
Group Images =
117
Auto Rotate =
126
Resume =
110
Image jump with =
117
6
Set Touch Actions =
127
Playback information display =
112
217
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Handling Precautions
●The camera is a high-precision electronic device. Avoid dropping it or
subjecting it to strong impact.
●Never bring the camera near magnets, motors, or other devices that
generate strong electromagnetic elds. The electromagnetic wave may
cause malfunction or erase image data.
●If water droplets or dirt adheres to the camera or screen, wipe with
a dry soft cloth, such as an eyeglass cloth. Do not rub hard or apply
force.
●Never use cleaners containing organic solvents to clean the camera
or screen.
●Use a blower brush to remove dust from the lens. If cleaning is difcult,
contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
●To prevent condensation from forming on the camera after sudden
changes in temperature (when the camera is transferred from cold to
warm environments), put the camera in an airtight, resealable plastic
bag and let it gradually adjust to the temperature before removing it
from the bag.
●If condensation does form on the camera, stop using it immediately.
Continuing to use the camera in this state may damage it. Remove
the battery pack and memory card, and wait until the moisture has
evaporated before resuming use.
●Store unused battery packs in a plastic bag or other container. To
maintain battery performance if you will not use the battery pack for
some time, about once a year charge it and then use the camera until
it runs out of power before storing the battery pack.
Specications
Camera
Image Sensor
Camera Effective Pixels
(Image processing may cause a decrease
in the number of pixels.) ........................Approx. 20.1 megapixels
Total Pixels........................................Approx. 20.9 megapixels
Image Size ........................................ 1.0 type
Lens
Focal Length
(35mm lm equivalent) ..................... 8.8 – 36.8 mm (24 – 100 mm)
Zoom Magnication ..........................4.2x
Step Zoom ........................................ 24, 28, 35, 50, 85, 100 mm
Digital zoom
Magnication.....................................Approx. 4x
Max. Magnication
(digital x optical zoom) ...................... Approx. 17x
Focal Length
(max. telephoto, 35mm lm equivalent) ....Equivalent to approx. 400 mm
Screen (Monitor)
Type .................................................. TFT color liquid crystal
Screen Size ......................................3.0 type
Effective Pixels .................................Approx. 1,040,000 dots
Continuous Shooting (CIPA compliant)
Speed
(Varies depending on the subject,
zoom position, and other shooting factors,
as well as memory card brands.) ............ ONE SHOT H: Approx. 8.0 shots/
sec. (max. 30 shots)
ONE SHOT L: Approx. 4.0 shots/
sec.
SERVO H: Approx. 5.4 shots/sec.
(max. 46 shots)
SERVO L: Approx. 4.0 shots/sec.
218
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Built-In Flash
Flash Range (Wide angle end) ......... 50 cm – 7.0 m (1.6 – 23 ft.)
Flash Range (Telephoto end) ...........40 cm – 4.0 m (1.3 – 13 ft.)
Shutter Speed
Auto Mode (automatic settings) ........ 1 – 1/2000 sec.
Range in all shooting modes
Max. ..............................................30 sec.
Min. ...............................................1/2000 sec.
Speed (unit: sec.).............................. Tv, M modes
(BULB) 30, 25, 20, 15, 13, 10,
8, 6, 5, 4, 3.2, 2.5, 2, 1.6, 1.3, 1,
0.8, 0.6, 0.5, 0.4, 0.3, 1/4, 1/5,
1/6, 1/8, 1/10, 1/13, 1/15, 1/20,
1/25, 1/30, 1/40, 1/50, 1/60, 1/80,
1/100, 1/125, 1/160, 1/200, 1/250,
1/320, 1/400, 1/500, 1/640, 1/800,
1/1000, 1/1250, 1/1600, 1/2000
Speeds in ( ) for M mode only
Cannot be set 1/6 or slower in
Manual movie mode
Aperture
F number .......................................... 1.8 – 11 (W)
2.8 – 11 (T)
AF
AF method ........................................ Face+Tracking AF (number of AF
frames: max. 31), Single-point AF
File Format ............................................ Design rule for Camera File
system (DCF) compliant; DPOF
(version 1.1) compatible
Data Type (Still Images)
Image File Format.............................Exif 2.3 (DCF 2.0)
Image Types ..................................... JPEG, RAW (Canon original:
14-bit, CR2)
Data Type (Movies)
Recording Format ............................. MP4
Video .................................................MPEG-4 AVC/H.264
Audio.................................................MPEG-4 AAC LC (stereo)
Power Source
Battery Pack .....................................NB-13L
Interface
Wired ................................................ Hi-Speed USB (Micro),
HDMI (Type D)
Wireless ............................................ Wi-Fi
Specications: IEEE 802.11b/g/n
Frequency: 2.4 GHz
Channels: 1 – 11
Security: WEP,
WPA-PSK (AES/TKIP),
WPA2-PSK (AES/TKIP)
NFC
Operating Environment
Temperature......................................0 – 40 °C (32 – 104 °F)
Dimensions (CIPA compliant)
(W x H x D) ........................................... 105.5 x 60.9 x 42.2 mm
(4.15 x 2.40 x 1.66 in.)
Weight (CIPA compliant)
Including Battery Pack,
Memory Card ....................................Approx. 319 g (approx. 11.3 oz.)
Camera Body Only ...........................Approx. 294 g (approx. 10.4 oz.)
219
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Number of Shots/Recording Time, Playback Time
Number of Shots (CIPA compliant) Approx. 265 shots
Number of Shots in Eco Mode Approx. 355 shots
Movie Recording Time (CIPA compliant)*1Approx. 55 min.
Movie Recording Time (Continuous
Shooting)*2Approx. 1 hr. 30 min
Playback Time*3Approx. 5 hr.
*1 Total time when shooting repeatedly under the following conditions:
- In [ ] mode, with all other settings set to defaults
- With recording, stopping, zooming, and turning the camera on and off
*2 Total time when shooting repeatedly under the following conditions:
- In [ ] mode, with all other settings set to defaults
- Without zooming or other operations
- Automatically stop/resume after the time or capacity per recording is reached
*3 Time when playing back a slideshow of still images.
Shooting Range
Shooting
Mode
Focus
Range
Maximum Wide Angle
( )
Maximum Telephoto
( )
*–5 cm – ∞
(2.0 in. – innity)
40 cm – ∞
(1.3 ft. – innity)
Other
modes
5 cm – ∞
(2.0 in. – innity)
40 cm – ∞
(1.3 ft. – innity)
5 cm – 50 cm
(2.0 in. – 1.6 ft.) –
5 cm – 50 cm
(2.0 in. – 1.6 ft.) –
1.5 m – 20 m
(5.0 – 65.6 ft.)
1.5 m – 20 m
(5.0 – 65.6 ft.)
* Same with manual focus enabled.
220
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Number of Shots per Memory Card
The number of shots at an aspect ratio (=
49) of 3:2 per memory card
is as follows. Note that the number of shots available varies by aspect
ratio.
Number of shots per 16 GB memory card (approx. shots)
1786
2999
3982
6656
6073
11043
7712
RAW 525
●The values in the table are based on Canon measurement conditions
and may change depending on the subject, memory card and camera
settings.
Recording Time per Memory Card
Size Frame Rate/
Video System
Recording
Time per 16 GB
Memory Card
(Approx.)
Recording
Time for
Individual
Movies
(Approx.)
(1920 x 1080)
(NTSC)
(PAL) 59 min. 30 sec. 29 min.
59 sec.
,
*(NTSC)
(PAL)
1 hour 26 min.
5 sec.
29 min.
59 sec.
(1280 x 720)
(NTSC)
(PAL)
4 hours 5 min.
15 sec.
29 min.
59 sec.
(640 x 480)
(NTSC)
(PAL)
10 hours 22 min.
35 sec. 1 hour
* Actual frame rate: 23.976 fps.
●The values in the table are based on Canon measurement conditions
and may change depending on the subject, memory card and camera
settings.
●Recording times for individual movies are based on memory cards
rated at an SD speed class of 10. Recording may stop when cards
rated at lower speed classes are used. Recording will also stop
automatically when the le size reaches 4 GB, or when the card
becomes full.
221
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Battery Pack NB-13L
Type: Rechargeable lithium-ion battery
Nominal Voltage: 3.6 V DC
Nominal Capacity: 1250 mAh
Charging Cycles: Approx. 300 times
Operating Temperatures: 0 – 40 °C (32 – 104 °F)
Battery Charger CB-2LH/CB-2LHE
Rated Input: 100 – 240 V AC (50/60 Hz)
0.09 A (100 V) – 0.06 A (240 V)
Rated Output: 4.2 V DC, 0.7 A
Charging Time: Approx. 2 hr. 10 min. (when using NB-13L)
Operating Temperatures: 5 – 40 °C (41 – 104 °F)
Compact Power Adapter CA-DC30/CA-DC30E
Rated Input: 100 – 240 V AC (50/60 Hz)
0.07 A (100 V) – 0.045 A (240 V)
Rated Output: 5.0 V DC, 0.55 A
Charging Time: Approx. 5 hr.* (Charged with NB-13L inserted
in the camera)
* Charging time varies considerably depending on
the remaining battery power.
Operating Temperatures: 5 – 40 °C (41 – 104 °F)
●Size, weight, and number of shots available are based on
measurement guidelines of the Camera & Imaging Products
Association (CIPA).
●Under some shooting conditions, the number of shots and recording
time may be less than mentioned above.
●Number of shots/time with a fully charged battery pack.
222
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Index
A
Accessories 178
AEB shooting 81
AE lock 78
AF frames 89
AF lock 94
AF method 89
Aspect ratio 49
Auto lighting optimizer 81
AUTO mode (shooting mode) 22, 34
Av (shooting mode) 101
B
Background defocus (shooting mode)
63
Batteries → Date/time (date/time
battery)
Battery charger 2, 178
Battery pack
Charging 18
Eco mode 171
Level 197
Power saving 27
C
Camera
Reset all 176
Camera access point mode 147
Camera Connect 142
CameraWindow 182
CANON iMAGE GATEWAY 153
Clock 33
Color (white balance) 82
Compression 97
Connecting via an access point 149
Continuous shooting 39, 44
Creative lters 130
Cropping 129, 185
C (shooting mode) 105
Custom white balance 83
D
Date/time
Changing 21
Date/time battery 21
Settings 20
World clock 172
Defaults → Reset all
Digital tele-converter 89
Digital zoom 41
Display language 22
DPOF 187
Dragging 17
E
Eco mode 171
Editing
Cropping 129
Red-eye correction 131
Resizing images 128
Editing or erasing connection
information 165
Electronic level 51
Erasing 123
Erasing all 124
Error messages 195
Exposure
AE lock 78
Compensation 78
FE lock 96
F
Face ID 45
Face select 93
Favorites 126
FE lock 96
File numbering 168
Fireworks (shooting mode) 56
Fish-eye effect (shooting mode) 60
Flash
Deactivating ash 95
Flash exposure compensation 96
On 95
Slow synchro 95
Focus bracketing 88
Focus check 119
Focusing
AF frames 89
AF lock 94
MF peaking 88
Servo AF 91
Touch AF 93
Focus lock 90
Focus range
Macro 87
Manual focus 87
Quick 57
Underwater macro 57
G
Geotagging images 164
GPS information display 113
Grainy B/W (shooting mode) 64
Grid lines 106
H
Handheld nightscene (shooting mode)
56
HDMI cable 179
High dynamic range (shooting mode)
60
High ISO speed noise reduction 80
Hybrid Auto (shooting mode) 36
I
iFrame movies (movie mode) 76
Image quality → Compression
Images
Display period 54
Erasing 123
Playback → Viewing
Protecting 121
Image stabilization 52, 99
Image Sync 162
Indicator 33, 53, 54
ISO speed 80
J
Jump display 117
M
M (shooting mode) 101
Macro (focus range) 87
Magnied display 119
Manual focus (focus range) 87
Manual (movie mode) 103
Memory cards 2
Recording time 220
Menu
Basic operations 30
Table 200
Metering method 79
223
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Star time-lapse movie (shooting
mode) 68
Star trails (shooting mode) 67
Story Highlights 136
Strap 2
T
Terminal 179, 184
Time-lapse movie (shooting mode) 74
Touch Actions 127
Touch AF 93
Touching 17
Touch-screen panel 17
Touch Shutter 44
Toy camera effect (shooting mode)
63
Traveling with the camera 172
Troubleshooting 191
TV display 179
Tv (shooting mode) 100
U
Underwater macro (focus range) 57
Underwater (shooting mode) 57
V
Viewing 24
Image search 115
Index display 115
Jump display 117
Magnied display 119
Single-image display 24
Slideshow 120
TV display 179
W
White balance (color) 82
Wi-Fi functions 141
Wi-Fi menu 144
Wind lter 73
World clock 172
Wrist strap → Strap
Z
Zoom 22, 35, 41
Miniature effect (shooting mode) 62
Movies
Editing 134
Image quality (recording pixels/
frame rate) 50
Recording time 220
N
ND lter 81
P
P (shooting mode) 77
Package contents 2
Panning (shooting mode) 59
Photobook set-up 190
PictBridge 179, 184
Playback → Viewing
Portrait (shooting mode) 56
Power 178 → Battery charger,
→ Battery pack
Power saving 27
Printing 184 → Printing
Program AE 77
Protecting 121
Q
Quick (focus range) 57
Quick Set menu
Table 203
R
RAW 98
RAW img processing 132
Recording pixels (image size) 97
Red-eye correction 131
Remote shooting 164
Reset all 176
Resizing images 128
Rotating 125
S
Saving images to a computer 182
Screen
Display language 22
Icons 197, 198
Menu → Quick Set menu, Menu
SD/SDHC/SDXC memory cards
→ Memory cards
Searching 115
Self portrait (shooting mode) 58
Self-timer 42
2-second self-timer 43
Customizing the self-timer 43
Sending images 158
Sending images to another camera
158
Sending images to a smartphone 142
Sending images to Web services 153
Servo AF 91
Shooting
Shooting date/time → Date/time
Shooting information 106, 197
Short clips (movie mode) 74
Slideshow 120
Soft focus (shooting mode) 64
Software
Installation 147, 182
Saving images to a computer
182
Sounds 173
Standard (movie mode) 72
Star (shooting mode) 65
Star nightscape (shooting mode)
66
224
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Wi-Fi (Wireless LAN) Precautions
●Countries and Regions Permitting WLAN Use
- Use of WLAN is restricted in some countries and regions, and illegal
use may be punishable under national or local regulations. To avoid
violating WLAN regulations, visit the Canon website to check where
use is allowed.
Note that Canon cannot be held liable for any problems arising from
use in other countries and regions.
●Doing any of the following may incur legal penalties:
- Altering or modifying the product
- Removing the certication labels from the product
●According to foreign exchange and foreign trade law regulations,
export permission (or service transaction permission) from the
Japanese government is necessary to export strategic resources or
services (including this product) outside Japan.
●Because this product includes American encryption software, it falls
under U.S. Export Administration Regulations, and cannot be exported
to or brought into a country under U.S. trade embargo.
●Be sure to make notes of the wireless LAN settings you use.
The wireless LAN settings saved to this product may change or be
erased due to incorrect operation of the product, the effects of radio
waves or static electricity, or accident or malfunction. Be sure to make
notes of wireless LAN settings as a precaution. Please note that
Canon accepts no responsibility for direct or indirect damages or loss
of earnings resulting from a degradation or disappearance of content.
●When transferring this product to another person, disposing of it, or
sending it for repair, be sure to note the wireless LAN settings and
reset the product to its default settings (erase settings) if necessary.
●Canon will not make compensation for damages resulting from loss or
theft of the product.
Canon accepts no responsibility for damages or loss resulting from
unauthorized access or use of target devices registered on this
product due to loss or theft of the product.
●Be sure to use the product as directed in this guide.
Be sure to use the wireless LAN function of this product within the
guidelines noted in this guide. Canon accepts no responsibility for
damages or loss if the function and product are used in ways other
than as described in this guide.
●Do not use the wireless LAN function of this product near medical
equipment or other electronic equipment.
Use of the wireless LAN function near medical equipment or other
electronic equipment may affect operation of those devices.
Radio Wave Interference Precautions
●This product may receive interference from other devices that emit
radio waves. To avoid interference, be sure to use this product as far
away as possible from such devices, or avoid using the devices at the
same time as this product.
Security Precautions
Because Wi-Fi uses radio waves to transmit signals, security precautions
more stringent than when using a LAN cable are required.
Keep the following points in mind when using Wi-Fi.
●Only use networks you are authorized to use.
This product searches for Wi-Fi networks in the vicinity and displays
the results on the screen. Networks you are not authorized to use
(unknown networks) may also be displayed. However, attempting to
connect to or using such networks could be regarded as unauthorized
access. Be sure to use only networks you are authorized to use, and
do not attempt to connect to other unknown networks.
225
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Trademarks and Licensing
●Microsoft and Windows are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
●Macintosh and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the
U.S. and other countries.
●App Store, iPhone, and iPad are trademarks of Apple Inc.
●The SDXC logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
●HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Denition Multimedia Interface are
trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing, LLC.
●The iFrame logo and the iFrame symbol are trademarks of Apple Inc.
●Wi-Fi®, Wi-Fi Alliance®, WPA™, WPA2™ and Wi-Fi Protected Setup™
are trademarks or registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance.
●The N-Mark is a trademark or registered trademark of NFC Forum, Inc.
in the United States and in other countries.
●All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
●This device incorporates exFAT technology licensed from Microsoft.
●This product is licensed under AT&T patents for the MPEG-4 standard
and may be used for encoding MPEG-4 compliant video and/or
decoding MPEG-4 compliant video that was encoded only (1) for
a personal and non-commercial purpose or (2) by a video provider
licensed under the AT&T patents to provide MPEG-4 compliant
video. No license is granted or implied for any other use for MPEG-4
standard.
Disclaimer
●Unauthorized reproduction of this guide is prohibited.
●All measurements based on Canon testing standards.
●Information subject to change without notice, as are product
specications and appearance.
●Illustrations and screenshots in this guide may differ slightly from the
actual equipment.
●The above items notwithstanding, Canon cannot be held liable for any
loss arising from the use of this product.
If security settings have not been properly set, the following problems may
occur.
●Transmission monitoring
Third parties with malicious intent may monitor Wi-Fi transmissions
and attempt to acquire the data you are sending.
●Unauthorized network access
Third parties with malicious intent may gain unauthorized access to
the network you are using to steal, modify, or destroy information.
Additionally, you could fall victim to other types of unauthorized access
such as impersonation (where someone assumes an identity to gain
access to unauthorized information) or springboard attacks (where
someone gains unauthorized access to your network as a springboard
to cover their tracks when inltrating other systems).
To prevent these types of problems from occurring, be sure to thoroughly
secure your Wi-Fi network.
Only use this camera’s Wi-Fi function with a proper understanding of
Wi-Fi security, and balance risk and convenience when adjusting security
settings.
The camera can print to PictBridge-compatible printers
via Wi-Fi. PictBridge technical standards make it easy
to connect digital cameras, printers, and other devices
directly. Additionally, a new standard called DPS
over IP enables PictBridge connections in network
environments, and the camera is also compatible with
this standard.